JP6632858B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to receive a game medium in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area, and a game medium in the game area. (General winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, character winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and game media can be received in the receiving opening. With this, a bonus (such as payout of a game medium, an occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage in opening and closing a variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, the gaming machine has a game board having a game area, a main body frame in which a game board is mounted inside a box having an open front side, and a front side of the main body frame is openably closed so that it can be opened and closed. A door frame having a window through which a game area can be visually recognized is provided. The door frame swells forward below the window on the front, and has a storage tray for storing game media and a handle at the lower right corner of the front. The player operates the handle to drive the game medium into the game area. The door frame is provided with a decorative body so as to surround the outer periphery of the window, thereby improving the appearance of the entire gaming machine.

  This type of gaming machine has an upper plate in which a game medium for driving into the game area is stored below a game area in a front view, and a lower plate which is arranged below the upper plate and stores the game medium. And (For example, Patent Documents 1 and 2)

  However, in a gaming machine provided with a dish for storing such a game medium, something more suitable for realizing the function as a dish is required.

JP 2012-217690 A JP 2012-110371 A

  The present invention proposes a more preferable configuration of a lower plate in a gaming machine.

The present invention
A game area in which a predetermined game is performed;
A bulging portion forming member that is provided on the door frame and forms a bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view;
An upper plate main body in which a game medium for performing a game in the game area is stored,
A lower plate main body which is disposed below the upper plate main body and through which a game medium can flow from a predetermined supply port to a storage area formed by a bottom wall having a predetermined shape and a vertical wall having a predetermined height,
A lower plate cover provided in a form directly connected to the lower plate body,
With
A predetermined internal space is formed inside the bulging portion,
The bulging portion forming member has a bulging shape that is vertically continuous from the front side of the upper plate main body to near the lower end of the door frame,
The lower plate cover is configured separately from the bulging portion forming member and the lower plate body,
The lower plate main body, the lower plate cover, and the bulging portion forming member contribute to making the internal space a space that is inaccessible to a player .

  According to the present invention, a more suitable lower plate can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from behind with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the right front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of a portion of the lower plate in a state where the lower plate cover is removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than (a). FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a different ball guiding portion is further provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is an explanatory view in which (c) is a schematic perspective view of the lower plate of (b). (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from before. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the effect operation unit and looked from behind. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. (A) is a view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a portion where the operation button is partially cut away to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame or the like of the operation button. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is the explanation drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (a) cut along a line GG. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (b) taken along line HH. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extended in the state turned to the front. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like in a view when the main screen is directed forward and the second operation operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like in a view of the operation button with the sub-screen facing forward, viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). 82A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 82B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from behind. FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel opaque. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 114 taken along the line RR. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 114 taken along the line SS. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front unit in the game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which cut | disconnected the attacker unit in a front unit in the substantially center of the front-back direction in a game area, and showed it from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center role as viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and looked at after. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along line TT in (a) and enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production knit mainly for every structural unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper movable effect unit for every main structural unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper first decorative body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper first decorative body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper second decoration body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper second decoration body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper third decoration body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper third decoration body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper rotation base unit from disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper rotation base unit from the disassembly. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear structure in a back upper rotation base unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the back upper rotating base unit in the operating position from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the non-operating position from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit in the back upper movable effecting unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lifting / lowering unit from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation unit as disassembled into a movable unit and a fixed unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation unit into a movable unit and a fixed unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the apparatus viewed from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit of the back elevating unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and was seen from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the drive system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is in the ascending position, and (b) is the driving system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is in the lowered position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back raising / lowering unit is a raise position in a back upper movable effecting unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back raising / lowering unit in a back upper movable effecting unit is a descent position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of an operation lever in an operation position, when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state where an operation lever is in a non-operation position when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back upper rotary base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back upper rotary base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back-upside rotation base unit when a movable side unit in a back-upside movable effect unit rotates a 45-degree clockwise from a horizontal position with a movable side unit lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back upper rotary base unit when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotary base unit is a vertical position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation lever is in the non-operation position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state where an operation lever regulates rotation at an operation position when a movable side unit is a down position and an upper back rotation base unit is a vertical position in a back upper movable effect unit. When the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effecting unit, the operation lever is in the operation position in the back upper first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back second decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which acts on three decoration body units. (A) is a front view of the underside movable production unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the underside movable production unit, and (c) is the underside movable decorative unit in the underside movable production unit. It is a rear view shown in the state where it raised. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable production unit in the back unit to the appearance position on the center side. After moving the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit in the back unit to the appearance position closer to the center, with each first decorative surface facing forward It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 171 so that the respective second decorative surfaces face forward. . FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 171 so that the respective third decorative surfaces face forward. . The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable of the second upper decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit After setting the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit in the closed position, respectively, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper second decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the body unit and the back upper rotation base unit to the lowering position, keeping the state of the horizontal position so that the back upper third decoration body unit may be arranged horizontally. From the state of FIG. 174, the back upper rotating base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the upper back first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit are inclined. It is a front view of the game board shown in a lined state. From the state shown in FIG. 175, the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, so that the back upper first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the lower upper third body are in the vertical position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the decoration body unit in the state which was lined up vertically. From the state of FIG. 176, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit in the open position, respectively, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made it visually recognizable. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower back movable decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the back unit was moved to the first ascending position. FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 178 and moved to a second raised position. As another embodiment of the game board, an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an LED for making a light emitting decoration of the center lens on the back of the back of the back unit is provided on the movable production unit on the back of the back unit. It is. In the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back upper rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit, The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the upper third decorative body unit in the open position, respectively. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens as being visible. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the third effect operation unit. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine which decomposes | disassembles and shows a part of 3rd effect operation unit. It is the perspective view which showed the attachment state of the 3rd effect operation unit. It is the perspective view which showed the whole rotating part and drive part in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is the perspective view which showed the internal structure of the drive part. It is a perspective view of the drive part which shows a part disassembled. It is sectional drawing which showed the inside of the drive part. It is a schematic diagram of a one-way rotating gear. It is sectional drawing which showed the attachment state of the mainspring spring. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a positional relationship between a handle and a driving unit. It is the schematic which showed the switching clutch mechanism. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the 4th production operation unit. It is sectional drawing which showed the state in which a linear member direction was variously selected. It is the side view by the cross section which showed the positional relationship of the linear member and the linear member direction detection apparatus. It is a figure for explaining a linear member direction detection mechanism. It is the perspective view which showed the inside of the linear member direction detection apparatus. It is a schematic diagram explaining the point which switches selected by the linear member direction differ. It is a control part shown by the block diagram. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the fifth production operation unit. It is the perspective view which showed the principal part of the 5th production operation unit mechanically. It is the schematic bottom view which showed the principal part of the 5th production operation unit mechanically. It is the schematic bottom view which showed the outline of operation | movement. It is the schematic front view which showed the principal part of the 5th production operation unit mechanically. It is the schematic front view which showed the outline of operation | movement. This is an example of using a pattern. It is a figure for explaining change of a picture. It is the figure where the handle was hanging. It is the figure which showed the moment state at the time of hanging. It is a perspective view of the drive part in the sixth effect operation unit. It is the figure which showed the handle structure by the vertical cross section. It is the perspective view which showed the principal part of the handle structure. It is a figure showing the rotation principle of a pull structure. It is a figure showing the state where a grip part rotates. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing other examples of a pull structure. It is a figure for explaining the example of use of a 6th example. It is a figure for explaining the example of use of a 6th example. It is the perspective view which showed the principal part of the 7th Example in outline. It is a timing chart figure regarding a player participation effect. It is a chart figure which illustrated average change of number of rotations R of a rotary ornament. FIG. 9 is a chart showing a relationship between a change in the number of rotations R of the rotating decorative body and rotation assistance. It is a chart figure for explaining the relation between the mode (type) of operation and rotation assistance. It is a chart figure for explaining a mode of rotation assistance. It is a flowchart figure of a player participation effect process. It is a figure for explaining the relation of operation in an example.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the device as viewed from behind after being disassembled.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. And a dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the front face, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 according to a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 accommodated in the payout control board box 950, and the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e in accordance with the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861 The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850 e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 that is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and houses a power supply board therein, An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a payout control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be increased by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, as viewed from below, with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). The upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same length as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10 and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and a lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D of the connecting member 85 described below are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the side surface outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has recesses 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have an internal cavity. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, An upright wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and bulging forward from near the upper end of the upright wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state where it is assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has an upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular shape and a quadrangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end portion extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to a portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have.
The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d.
Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.
Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal shaft support state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in a diagonal direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c.
Thereby, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, in the case where the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game sphere is placed on the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 mounted on the front left of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; Door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been fired by the firing device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges the ball to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, but is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface swells forward, The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the cash and the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Ball return display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light emitting decoration.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 has a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top decoration member 576, which will be described in detail later. A decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and a decorative top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) such that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which project forward from the door frame base 110 to form the body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 mounted rotatably on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 in front view, and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers a lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190; and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is provided with a through-hole 111 that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Accordingly, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210, the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along an upper side of a rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcing member attached to a lower side of the through-hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The locking unit 135 includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate.
The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of projections. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a, and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. And a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape that is open forward when viewed from the side. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece for connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on a rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a bent horizontally. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The upper end of the lock spring 144 contacts the flange member 143, and the lower end of the lock spring 144 contacts the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a lower projecting portion. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is provided with a door frame when the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be lowered below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.
Therefore, the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is configured to insert the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame from below into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 on the body frame side, or to pull it downward. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is viewed. The main frame 4 can be rotatably supported by the hinge.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a column-shaped door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The hinge pin 152 below the door frame has a lower end formed in a truncated cone shape that tapers downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in a front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to almost the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 162 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface, respectively, which can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for removably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projection 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the state is stabilized in a state where the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182, and a plurality of annular flange portions 182 protruding into the tubular portion 181 and extending over the entire length of the tubular portion 181 in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three) are provided with ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where the handle unit 300 is similarly tilted so that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward from a position lower than the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 has a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and is spaced apart in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball being driven into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects from the lower side of the main body 201 to the rear. The removed rear protruding piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening / closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape projecting forward in plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate parts 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. As for a pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is mounted on the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate part 213a and the pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front with the ball feeding unit exploded, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball firing device 680 one by one, and also converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 into the upper plate balls. The lower tray can be pulled out by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110, and penetrate in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a, and a box-shaped front cover 251 having a rear end opened, and a box having a front end opened and a rear end closed. A rear cover 252 having a hit ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, and the rear cover 252 and the front cover. The partition 253 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and a partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b behind the front cover 251. And the game balls on the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and are vertically moved between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, as shown in the drawing, a ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and a ball punching member 253 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. The ball feeding solenoids 255 are respectively arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 has an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball-pulling member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b in a front view. The operation rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 described later extends forward. The front cover 251 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball empty guide path 323f of the plate unit base 323. It is formed so that the part that is opened rearward on the end side is closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 253 has a partition part 253a below the entrance 251a, between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, the upper surface of which is lower toward the ball feeding member 254, and a ball of the partition 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end turns around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable supporting rod 253b, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 253b, and a lower side than the operating rod 253c from the side of the rotating rod 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253c is in contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper bowl removing button 327 of the bowl unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. And a ball holding portion 254b which is depressed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the rod 254c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis is moved left and right by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position where the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and a ball holding portion 254b that faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing the side. When the ball feeding member 254 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball enters the partition 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement to the ball holding unit 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) side is blocked by the blocking unit 254a, and the ball stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod 254c side closes the hit ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the ball feeding operating rod 256 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which swings up and down. And a ball feed crank 257 that turns the ball feed member 254 about the axis that extends in the vertical direction while rotating about the axis that extends in the direction. The ball-feeding crank 257 is configured to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball-feeding operation rod 256 and extend in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b to feed the ball; And a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the member 254.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256 that swings by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to cause the ball feed member 254 to move. Can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 and its tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball-feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It is in the state located at. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is sucked by the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball-feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state). Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the ball-pulling member 253 rotatably supported in the ball-feeding unit 250 receives a moment to rotate in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. When the actuated rod 253c contacts the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dishing button 327 of the dishing unit 320, the rotation thereof is regulated. Is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player pushes down the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. As a result, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  In addition, since the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 327b in which the operation transmission part 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 contacts is formed, it is urged upward by the upper counter-ball-pulling spring 327c. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 253a.

  The ball feed unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape when viewed from the front extends left and right, and is separated vertically from the right side by a predetermined distance from the right side to the upper side in the vertical direction at the center, and A lower piece 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 are provided. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment concave portion 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a fraudulent act of operating a string to move an illegal game ball into and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the improper game ball fired (hit) by the ball launching device 680 generates an illegal action. After the string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 becomes narrower. It is possible to cut by a part, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using a fraudulent game ball attached with a string.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown, the foul cover unit 270 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. Fail cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of lower full tank path unit 860 of main body frame 4 and upper plate ball supply port 323a of plate unit 320. A full tank receiving port 274 that opens rearward at the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through-ball path 273 when viewed from the front and is capable of communicating with the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And

  Further, foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 274 and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 680 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 which opens forward near the lower right corner in front view. And a ball discharge port 276 communicating with the lower ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball reception port 274 and the foul ball reception port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit body 271 and the cover member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A large-sized storage passage 277, a flat movable piece 278 which forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 for urging the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of the foul cover units 270 are stored in the storage passage 277. Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game ball. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Accordingly, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the further payout of the game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be prompted to cancel the full state of the lower plate 322.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and is a guideway opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 860 in the below-described payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4. 863 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the operating projection 863e can contact (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact. When the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player so that a game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 at the rear side of the handle 302, and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, the handle base 301 and the inner A handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 such that the handle 302 is returned to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). One end is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end is attached to the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 urged in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side is outward from the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304. A single button 311 attached to the base 301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. I have.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a concave portion from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three grooves 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three grooves 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively formed in the three grooves 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, and the other end of the handle return spring 308 is locked. Locking protrusion 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction in a front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 302a is located on the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 302b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 302b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first projection 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 302c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has substantially straight sides on both sides, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a that are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulged forward, and protrude rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front, and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined such that the right end side is located rearward from the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached via the outside is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, the tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform the rotating operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball firing device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is hit into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with a conductive material. When the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in any way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball may be hit. I cannot do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player rotates the handle 302, the single-button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the firing unit of the payout control board 951 (shown in FIG. ), The rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. Accordingly, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be driven into the game area 5a again with the strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most clockwise in a front view. When the game ball is hit most strongly in the game area 5a (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is positioned at the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The plate unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front of the plate unit 320.

  The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate unit base 323 mounted on the upper front of the plate unit base 323. An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the lower left portion of the front of the plate unit base 323 from the left and right centers and swelling greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

  The dish unit 320 has an upper dish ball removing button 327 attached to the upper dish 321 on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so as to be able to be pressed from the upper right side and a front view of the upper dish ball removing button 327. A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side in front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 A ball return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and a plate front upper decorative portion 326b in front of the plate 321 and in front of the plate unit cover 326. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and projecting forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. And has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side bulges forward more than the left and right center in front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward. Have been. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion that is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and has a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. I have. The upper plate 321 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a in front view is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate supply port 323 a of the plate unit base 323 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323 d. Are inclined so as to be lower toward the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower decreases downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is mounted. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and is contacted (rolled) by the game ball to form the game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball hole 322a which penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a so that game balls can be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the provided effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is concave in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 that is open at the top and rear, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate main body 325 from the left end side, and a lower plate main body 325. And a lower plate cover 340 that covers a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view is a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrilateral is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. , And the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a excluding a rear end side, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower saucer hole 322a penetrating up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right, and a front side of the rectangular shape is formed as a bottom side, and an upper side shorter than the base side is disposed on the front side, and the left and right sides that are obliquely extended are curved so as to be recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid and a trapezoid. (The upper surface of) the bottom wall portion 325a is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower countersunk hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate body 325 (bottom wall 325a). In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portions at the front right corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b correspond to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from an upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and a substantially lower end from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling part 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to a rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower dish cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and a portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. I have.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in front view of a portion extending short to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in front view. Is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half goes around the effect operation unit 400. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatched area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 described later, and a lower plate. The lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located on the right side of the opening 326d (behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Region). In other words, the lower plate 322 has at least half of a storage area (equivalent to a storage area in a plan view, a combined area of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which game balls can be stored, It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area indicated by the dotted line is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall is opened on the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326 (to the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d), and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. The lower plate is disposed in the lower second plate area A2 at the rear side. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is invisible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to go down from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (plate unit cover 326) bulging forward toward the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second region A2 is larger than the lower plate first region A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the lower plate 322 is such that the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second area A2) has the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. ), The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 has a lower plate hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower plate hole 322a. The lower plate ball removing hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed by a cover member 334 that is opened and closed by operating a pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball hole 322a is closed by the cover member 334, so that game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. When the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower bowl removing button 333, the game balls in the lower bowl 322 can be discharged from the lower bowl removing hole 322a to below the bowl unit 320.

  The lower plate hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is disposed in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate supply port 323 c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322 a is located to the right of the lower plate opening 326 d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 has an outer peripheral shape formed by combining a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of a square extending left and right, and a bottom plate having a lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward. Therefore, in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is placed directly in front of the lower bowl supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower countersunk hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, when the lower bowl extraction hole 322a is open, the lower bowl supply hole 322a is open. The game balls supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 do not directly flow to the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and are discharged from the lower plate hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower bowl input hole 322c is located to the left of the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower bowl 322 from near the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. The right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate hole 322a. When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower hole 322a without going to the left side of the lower hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate hole 322a, the lower plate hole 322a is formed. Is open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c do not enter the area on the left side of the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a of the lower dish 322, but immediately from the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower bowl extracting hole 322a is kept open, the game balls flowing on the lower bowl 322 cannot be seen from the player side, and the ball is paid out from the upper bowl 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that a game ball or the like is directly discharged to a dollar box can be made to be an illusion, and it is difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. And effect images, etc.) can be prevented from decreasing the interest.

  The lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b. Even if the game ball supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 jumps and jumps, the game ball can be prevented from intruding from the lower plate 322 to the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) from contacting the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from contacting or pressing the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). This can prevent the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower ball supply hole 323c, the lower plate 322 is released from the lower plate supply hole 323c when the lower plate hole 322a is open. It is possible to cause the played game balls to directly enter the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharge the balls downward (dollar box), so that the game balls are less likely to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. Can be. In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and break them. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower countersunk hole 322a may be linked to the upper countersunk button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described operational effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, an example in which the cover standing wall 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main plate standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is shown. The cover standing wall portion 340a may rise. Also, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the relief portion 322b for avoiding contact of the lower plate 322 with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. The lower plate 322 may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the like) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole, but a plurality of penetrating holes through which game balls cannot pass. It may be one having a hole formed. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, and the like of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. They may be formed in a net or net shape. Note that a light-emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the plate unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (light-emitting decoration) through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, these four members may be integrated in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated. An integrated one, a lower plate cover 340 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a lower plate main body 325 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326; Are integrated, the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guiding section of lower plate]
An embodiment in which the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 includes a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). FIG. 9C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding section. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A, the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 between the lower plate supply hole 323c and the lower hole 322a. It has a pair of ball guiding portions 322c that are arranged left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c is formed in a rail shape (projection) extending forward and backward while protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is guided to the lower bowl extracting hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding parts 322c without going over the ball guiding part 322c, It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Similarly, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball in the rear (lower plate second area A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower dish 322 of the present example is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower dish extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 into the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, the illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, so that the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c has a rail shape, but the ball guiding portion 322c is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to be able to be guided to the countersunk hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 46B, the game ball discharged diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The ball is formed in such a shape as to reflect in the direction of the lower bowl extraction hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer 322d at a position where the game ball contacts. This buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam, or the like.

  In the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower bowl supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl removing hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower bowl feeding port 323c is reflected by the buffer 322d in the direction of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a, and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl extracting hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball comes into contact with the buffer 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the rendering operation unit 400 and the rendering operation in the plate unit cover 326 which are the lower plate second area A2). It is disposed behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and is not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower bowl drain hole 322a without sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like dispensed from the upper plate 321 and the dispensing device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls from the lower plate 322 is not heard, so that the ball is directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Subsequently, the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46C is a portion of the bottom surface (bottom wall 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate supply port 323c with the lower plate hole 322a therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball, which protrudes upward from the lower ball drain hole 322a and jumps over the lower ball drain hole 322a, toward the lower ball drain hole 322a. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam, which alleviates a collision sound at the time of reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower plate 322 or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322 (the main body standing wall portion 325b).

  In this lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c, a lower plate ball hole 322a, and a return portion 322e are arranged linearly in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate 326 of the plate unit cover 326 is arranged. To the rear of the opening 326d on the right side (behind the effect operation unit 400, which is the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front wall of the lower plate cover 340, etc.). It is arranged and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a jumps over the lower ball hole 322a, the return portion 322e forms the lower ball hole 322a. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersunk hole 322a. Therefore, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ball guiding section 322c and the buffer section 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate which can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) schematically shows a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In FIG. 47, the area indicated by the dotted hatching indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) forms a part of the lower plate first region A1 and a part of the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It comprises a main body 325A and a first extension 325B attached to the right side of the main body 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower second plate area A2. The first additional portion 325B is further provided with the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) is housed (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). (Space behind). As illustrated, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension portion 325B is formed with a relief portion 322b at the right front corner to avoid contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and thus is lower than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is large. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a lower plate first region A1 and a part of the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate hole 322a and a main body 325A. A second extension 325C, which is attached to the right side of the portion 325A and constitutes the remaining region of the lower plate second region A2, is larger than the first extension 325B. As shown in the drawing, the second extension 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension 325B. The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C to the main body 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communicated), and the storage area of the game balls is provided. Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C of the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (attachment to the mounting space 326j) between the rendering operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second rendering operation unit 400A. (Space).

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate main body 325 (the lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The storage area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, it projects to the rear (in the mounting space 326j) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. An extension portion (first extension portion 325B or second extension portion 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). It may be arranged on the boundary between the first dish area A1 and the second dish area A2, or may be arranged in the first dish area A1.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball hole 322a in the main body 325A. However, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C are not provided. A lower countersunk hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are mounted on the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325. You may make it attach a flat-plate-shaped closing member which does not have a storage area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described. However, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, and the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 323 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111, and extends in the right and left direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear portion is open). (Shallow box shape).

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 323a. A speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward at a lower portion closer to the left from the left and right center in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; An upper dish ball feed port 323d penetrating back and forth at the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in front view and extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper dish body 324.

  The dish unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides the game ball sent to the rear side of the dish unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250; After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, it extends in a substantially L-shape so as to become lower toward the right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a cylindrical front view, and extends from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball-pulling guide path 323f for guiding the released game balls to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323e and a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323e and a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323f. And an operation transmitting portion 327a which is in contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feed unit 250 and is operated by the upper countersunk button 327 projects backward so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The downstream end of the ball guide path 323f is open in a cylindrical portion of the lower counter ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

An upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 has a front end opening to a rear wall of the upper plate 321 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end has an upper plate passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270.
Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  When the lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 322, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, game balls flowing in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is disposed behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside the lower dish opening 326d) in the dish unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower dish cover 340, and the like. When viewed from the front, the door frame 3 is invisible from the player through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The plate unit cover 326 has a center in the left-right direction that swells forward, and has a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction. An upper plate front decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a lower plate front decorative portion 326c formed below each of the left and right upper plate front decorative portions 326b. I have.

  The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the plate unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at the height. The effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined such that the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The plate front upper decorative portion 326b has its front surface moved rearward from the left-right center to the left-right end of the plate unit cover 326, and the left-right center end and the left-right center end of the plate unit cover 326. An intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly swelling forward with respect to a plane connecting the end portions. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end moves upward from the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) to both left and right sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper plate decoration portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front lower portion 326c of the dish unit 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right ends of the dish unit cover 326, and the left and right ends of the center of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface so as to be depressed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the ends of the first and second portions.

  A lower plate opening 326d penetrating front and rear is formed in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of punched metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the plate unit base 323 when assembled to the plate unit 320.

  A handle insertion opening 326f, which penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view and through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, is provided in the lower right front dish counterpart 326c in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion opening 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323. It covers the upper right side. The top plate portion 326h is provided with a top ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display portion 330.

  The plate unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the plate lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The bottom of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape such that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed upward from below, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to that portion. In the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole vertically penetrating is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left and upper sides of the lower plate opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 contacts the left end, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 contacts the right end. I have.

[3-3e. Button for removing the upper plate ball]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front, and by pressing the game ball in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate removing button 327 is not illustrated in detail. Is mounted so as to be rotatable around an axis extending therethrough. The upper ball removing button 327 has an upper end of a vertically extending ball removing lever in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof. The ball-pull lever is mounted to be vertically slidable by a ball-pull base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the plate-pull button 327.

  The ball-pulling lever, whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the ball-pulling button 327, comes into contact with the upper part of the ball-pulling slider 327b, which is slidable up and down by the plate unit base 323, from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmitting portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmitting portion 327a is moved from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feed unit 250. The slider 327b is urged upward by a spring 327c, and the biasing force of the spring 327c causes the slider 327b and the lever to remove the ball. The upper bowl removing button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper counter-ball-pulling button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper counter-ball-pulling-out spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmitting portion 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 which is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, so that they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  Note that, when the upper bowl removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with it. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by focusing the player on the game (such as a game ball hitting operation and effect image). Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display section 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are in a circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Mounted on

  The ball lending button 328 is used to push a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and press the ball lending machine to play a predetermined number of game balls. It is lent (paid out) to the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after deducting the lending game ball.

  Although illustration is omitted, a three-digit seven-segment LED is arranged below the transparent surface of the ball lending display unit 330, and the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or An error code when the ball rental machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Direction selection left button and Direction selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end near the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the dish upper decoration portion 326b on the left side of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward to the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. When an effect image for prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower tray ball removal button 333 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the lower front plate decoration portion 326c on the left side in front view below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. By pressing the lower bowl removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 can be rotated. The lower plate hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

  The lower plate removing button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower plate removing base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 below the lower plate main body 325. Mounted on The lower bowl removing button 333 is disposed on the left side of the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The base plate 335 of the plate unit cover 326 is provided on the base plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be accommodated in a portion formed below the lower plate 322 in a stepped shape so as to be recessed upward from below. It is attached to the part 326i. An outlet 335a, which has the same size as the lower ball drain hole 322a and penetrates vertically, is formed at a position directly below the lower hole 322a. . Although not shown in detail, the cover member 334 is disposed between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. Thus, when the lid member 334 closing the lower plate hole 322a for the lower plate 322 is opened, the outlet 335a of the lower plate hole 335a is also opened, and the lower hole 322a and the outlet 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the cover member 334 is attached to the lower bowl removing base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position to the left of the lower bowl removing button 333 in plan view. The lower ball removing button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower ball removing hole 322 a and a portion rotatably mounted by the lower ball removing base 335. Thereby, when the lower countersunk ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower countersunk ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the holding device for holding the lower plate ball release button 333 when the lower plate ball release button 333 is pressed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball release button And a lower countersunk ball release spring that urges 333 forward. In a state in which the lower ball pull-out button 333 is protruded forward and the lower ball pull-out hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower ball pull-out button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the lower tray ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device, so that the lower tray ball removal button 333 remains moved rearward. In this state, even if the button 333 is released, the button 333 does not move forward, and the hole 322a for opening the ball 322 is kept open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, in a state where the lower countersunk ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower countersunk ball extracting hole 322a is open, when the lower countersunk ball extracting button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the button 333 is released, the button 333 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring, and returns to the protruding state, and the cover 334 is turned. Then, the lower countersunk hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thus, game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  Note that, apart from the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball discharging hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also movable by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327. The lower bowl removing hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when the player wants to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327, the dollar box can be moved through the lower plate 322. And the trouble associated with emptying the ball can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back.
FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction, so that the player can perform a pressing operation and can present a rendering image to the player. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a central side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the operation button 410 is capable of being pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller in diameter than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction, extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed in a circular arc cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration part 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b provided.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than it does.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from a front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer periphery of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the upper, lower, left, and right directions. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are depressed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter at the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) and is formed transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Urged forward. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side of the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The part 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be viewed from the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It becomes a state protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the decoration button 422 outside the operation button left and the decoration board 423 outside the operation button right of the decoration board unit 420, respectively, emits light from the button. It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and to operate the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the rear, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and has a central opening 416a that penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c cut at a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thereby, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are respectively provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are each closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut out. In a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Further, the frame main body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e extending outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery, and mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416 e and the cutout portion 416 c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metallized except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is mounted) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a are provided in the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are respectively connected to the second LED 422 b and 423 b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit, as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange 413 b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted radially outside the inner circumference of the board base 421 than the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along.
The decoration board 423 outside the operation button right extends in an arc along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted radially outside the inner circumference of the board base 421 than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear both sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Accordingly, the decorative board unit 420 causes only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit and decorate with light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. At the same time, the light from each of the second LEDs 422b and 423b allows only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view showing the base unit of the effect operation unit in a disassembled state and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 has the operation buttons 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

  The base unit 430 has four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and extending vertically in the center and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape, and blind holes opened forward outside the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a light-transmissive operation button decoration member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a, and extending short and longitudinally in a tubular manner; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 and the operation button inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, respectively. At the rear, the operation attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. The three pressing detection sensors 440 respectively attached to the 439 and detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through-hole 431a has a size that fits inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners of the operation button 410 outside the through hole 431a. The holding hole 431b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, and the guide boss 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. .

  The unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c which protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from a portion on the upper front surface between a portion where the inner decorative board 435 on the operation button is mounted and a portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is mounted. It has. With this light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

  The decoration member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape such that a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending short in the front-rear direction and a front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c extending vertically through the front plate portion 432b, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that protrude rearward from the unit base 431 and are mounted on the unit base 431.

  The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the decoration member 432 for operation buttons, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed as smooth surfaces without irregularities.

  The in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is concave in an arc shape, extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button in-button decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center, and concentric with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center. 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decorative portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The interior of the operation button decorating member 432 is made invisible behind clearly by the lens effect of the first button decorating portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button decorating portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be made to emit light. By making the decoration member 432 inside the operation button emit light, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be made light emission decoration.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437, and the LEDs can emit light, so that the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full color LEDs, respectively. It has been. The front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 in a state where the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the unit base 431, three pressing detection sensors 440 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other at the lower left. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b through sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The production operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, to the left of the through hole 431a in rear view (right side in front view). The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, an inner decoration board 436 below the operation button, a frame top lens decoration board 437, a pressure detection sensor 440, and a door frame side effect display device 460 for relaying the connection with the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. Things.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward in a front view from the lower end of a portion that covers the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg 442a attached to a lower rear part of the unit base 431. When assembled to the door frame 3, the leg 442 a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and a leg 442 a between the leg 442 a and the bottom plate 326 i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed down or hit, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment portion 416e and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect operation unit attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, thereby preventing their breakage.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 in the shape of a bottomed rectangular tube. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is mounted such that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape is in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut away and the first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame or the like attempts to hide the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which it is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a total height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than 大 き く of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Are formed. In other words, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thereby, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line, It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the gaming area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation buttons 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal operation state, the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center (the side of the center axis CL). I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the effect operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the center axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, and the operation button is There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is panned so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 since the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part, since it is mounted on the production operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326. In addition, the whole of the effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can be operated. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame is not moved until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The shock can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Accordingly, even when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player with the effect of pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even when strongly hit, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are composed of transparent members. The decoration by the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button decoration part 432f, the second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. Thereby, it is possible to make it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall part of the decoration member 432 in the operation button Although the gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button decoration member 432 is located from the front side (player side) from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, thereby improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411 a and the second button decoration portion 411 b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside operation button decoration member 432 are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative portion 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Moreover, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button decoration portion 432g, the player can see a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern to the player, and can enjoy the decoration including the operation button 410.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a is obtained. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g is changed, the player can see a moving decoration and entertain the player.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the interest of the player strongly and has a high appeal.

The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button right inner decoration board 433 inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button interior decoration member 432. An upper inner decorative substrate 435 and an operation button lower inner decorative substrate 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated.
In other words, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is provided. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 of the unit unit 431 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the lower rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A as a second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as in the effect operation unit 400 are denoted by the same reference numerals and described.

  The second production operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 whose outer shape is circular and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparent, and which can be pressed by the player, and an effect of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame unit 415 having a frame shape attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission. A second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a second base unit 450 that can be visually recognized from the player through the operation button 410. The second effect table on the door frame side that is attached to and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view are arranged. And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view so as to cover the same. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is transparent at the center excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side swells forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 have a pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and a guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex at the center of the button lens 411 at a position in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. The button lens 411 in a truss-like pattern and a truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles directed toward one another and a triangle with one vertex directed to the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction in a plurality of rows. , A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom extending toward the center of the button lens 411 from both ends of the bottom, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom. From the hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the bottom of the truss pattern triangle to the center of the button lens 411, and the tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration unit 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle forming the first button decoration portion 411a has a polyhedral shape with its respective surfaces facing different directions. Thereby, while the front side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. In the part, the thickness of the button lens 411 is complicatedly changed, and light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and is held inside the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Are slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIGS. 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. And the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction. It is something that can be done.

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and projects rearward from the front surface of the unit base 451 into four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. And four button shafts 452 each having a cylindrical shape inserted slidably therefrom, and an operation button spring through which each of the four button shafts 452 is inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b projecting hemispherically rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that extends vertically when viewed and extends through the cover 451b in the front-rear direction, four holding holes 451d that are recessed rearward from the front of the main body 451a, and a main body 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion of the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body 451a. A (U-shaped) lower bearing portion 451f and a left and right side of an upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a, and the rotation of the screen unit 470. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery having substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape.
The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed to have a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f rotates. I have. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side to pass from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. These holding holes 451d are formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, so that the guide boss 413c can be inserted.
A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the center axis of each of the four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss 413c. Can be.

  The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The upper right holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, of the four holding holes 451d, two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. .

  Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively. When the front ends of these operation button springs abut against the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, the operation button springs are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is biased forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. The upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f are provided with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A inserted from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be rotatably supported.

  As for a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451, the front surfaces of the respective front portions pass through the central axes of the semicircular portions of the upper bearing portion 451e whose U-shaped recessed portions are recessed rearward. And are separated from each other in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by being brought into contact with the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. I have. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to a 90-degree angle range by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

  Although not shown, a magnet is buried in each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and is magnetically attached to the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, so as to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is hard to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward or the second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward in the screen unit 470 by the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the screen unit 470 is prevented from rotating by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side is controlled. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are mounted on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, three pressing detection sensors 454 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 451d, and the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display an effect image to a player through a transparent portion of the operation button 410. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a screen unit 470 attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base unit. An upper bearing member 480 mounted on the upper front of the unit 450 and rotatably mounting the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and mounted on the lower front of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably mounts the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In addition, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side rotates the screen unit 470 to rotate the driving unit 490 mounted on the upper portion of the second base unit 450 and the cover unit 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a rear surface of the unit base 451 attached to the projector 500 so as to cover the cover 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 having an open front and a mounting gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 on the left side of the rotary drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front, so as to cover from above. Upper cover 506 and the upper And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The screen unit 470 of the door frame-side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected and displayed) so as to be visible to the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, has a milky white translucent main screen 471, and has a disk-like shape in which one end side of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is part of the outer periphery, and has a central portion having an axis. The sub-screen 472 which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction and is translucent and milky white, and protrudes outward from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 in the direction perpendicular to the axis, respectively. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473, and has gear teeth 475 a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and penetrates the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) formed in a relief shape imitating a transparent and predetermined character (skull); A sub-screen decorative board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on a surface facing the sub-screen 472, and a side opposite to the sub-screen 472 of the main screen 471. And a semicircular peripheral decoration member 478 extending shortly from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a and the peripheral decoration member 478 of the sub-screen 472.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a. And a curved general screen portion 472b. The entire peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape such that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a direction away from the main screen 471 into a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 from the front, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The operation gear member 475 meshes with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and is formed with a gear tooth 475a formed over a substantially half circumference, and protrudes outward from one of circumferential ends of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b, and a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is concave in an arc around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 when assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by contacting the pair of rotation regulating parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave portion 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that contacts the rotation restricting portion 451g, and the iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape simulating a skull by a transparent member, and the thickness thereof is complicatedly changed. It is difficult. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the letter “PUSH” is formed in the relief imitating the skull of the sub-screen decorative member 476.

  The sub-screen decorative board 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative board 477 can make the skull “eyes” and the letters “PUSH” emit light and light by making the LED 477a emit light.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not include a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the LED 477a. , The LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in the circumferential direction of the arc like the peripheral decorative portion 472a. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image which is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape and which is attracted to the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has an effect image from the projector 500 formed in a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) around the center sub-screen decorative member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 at the back center. (The range), and aims to display an effect image that gorgeously colors the periphery of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and presses the operation button 410 to the player by the light-emitting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front sides of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, which are opened forward. It is attached to the front of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 mounted on the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member. And a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a that is concave in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the concave portion 481a. The concave portion 481a that is concave in the arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative board 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state where it is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Accordingly, the LED of the frame top lens decorative board 482 emits light, so that the frame top lens 418 can emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 is provided. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and has a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear and is meshable with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. Can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is arranged in a hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates the effect image forward from the front end.

  In this projector 500, the rear part of the projector main body 501 is mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and the lens part 502 and the projector main body 501 pass through the through-hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side and are arranged in the cover part 451b. Mounted as

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector and has an automatic focusing function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector attachment member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front. The projector 500 is mounted inside the projector mounting member 505, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state where the projector 500 is inclined so as to match the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating back and forth are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in a front view.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 while being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operation gears in the screen unit 470 are provided. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 include a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward and a detection piece 475c when the sub-screen 472 faces forward. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by the two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to a lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and reduces a shock when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and a plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and is in contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 attached to the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 so as to be relatively accessible.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a in contact with the lower surface of the shock-absorbing member 511, and leg portions protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in front view and extending in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in a state where the leg piece portion 512b is assembled to the door frame 3.

  The buffer unit 510 is configured such that when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510. To move down. The shock is absorbed by the compression of the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member abutting on the upper surface of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the attachment unit 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment unit of the plate unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Operation and effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the center axis | shaft of the operation button extended with the screen facing front. FIG. 75A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 75B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. FIG. 76 (a) is a view in which the second production operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second production operation unit hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, and the like of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button operation in accordance with a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410 and to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a total height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.
Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, the second effect operation unit 400A changes the center axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) into a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can reach its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). , And the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring. Of the frame main body 416 in the vicinity of the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the effect operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. Likely to be. To be more specific, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is mounted so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is operated. Since the button 410 is attached such that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part is pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, and the operation button is There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player is pressed forward. When the operation button 410 is pressed at a position distant from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the vibration effect motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended as described above. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. As a result, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the second effect operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below a position where the player can relatively easily press the operation button (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), a strong vibration is applied to the player pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the production can be enjoyed by surprise the player.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are provided. The buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that can be elastically deformed, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a on which the cushioning member 511 contacts the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is multi-staged by the elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or the bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the second effect operation unit 400A is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is presented to the player, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is compared with a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are increased, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even when the button lens 411 is strongly hit, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are formed of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63).
In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the plurality of first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make the rear of the button lens 411 hardly visible at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combining the triangles. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side The gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. Can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player who has seen the operation button 410 can In addition to preventing discomfort, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, and the like, from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outside portion (the cross hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76) is not seen from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are hardly seen. It can be hidden, so that the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and thus the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be improved.

  When the main screen 471 is in the first position in which the main screen 471 faces forward, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411 cause the general screen portion of the sub-screen 472 to move. The 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are hard to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub-screen 472, the fact that the main screen 471 is rotatable, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation By performing a motion that exceeds the player's expectation within the button 410, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the sub-screen 472 faces the front, the upper button member 473 and the lower axis are provided by the first button decoration section 411a, the second button decoration section 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (the sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain players.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a button lens 411 that allows the user to visually recognize the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. Within the range of a predetermined width, a first button decoration portion 411a in the form of a polyhedron in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined is provided, and the second effect display on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged and a peripheral decorative member 478. As a result, the triangle decoration (first button decoration part 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrilateral decoration (peripheral decoration part 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap so as to intersect. As a result, a complicated geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the appearance can be improved to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle and the peripheral decoration 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of a square are separated in the front-rear direction, so that the player's eyes can be seen. As the position moves, the degree of overlap changes, so that the overlapping geometrical pattern changes, allowing the player to see the moving decoration and the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. Can be shown to entertain the player.

  Further, in the second effect display device 460 </ b> A on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the drive of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward or to move the sub screen 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in a state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a and the peripheral edge decorative member 478 are vertically separated from each other and vertically extended. The decoration made up of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row forms a geometric pattern decoration that vertically traverses the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to players. On the other hand, in a state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of extending in a ring shape, and is a decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a ring. However, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern decoration that overlaps the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the change in the decoration attracts the player's interest to the operation button 410 or the decoration of the decoration. The change can suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player, and can make the player entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having different switchable screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the display unit includes the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the effect image display by the liquid crystal display device, and to have a strong impact on the player. Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disk-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided at a rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis in the circumferential direction.

  Then, in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, in a state where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical center axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangular (rectangular) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is emitted forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the translucent milky white Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 has a smooth semi-cylindrical surface, the effect image has a display screen curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Thus, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Can be recognized, and the player can be surprised, and the player can be made to pay attention to the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the disc-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 It can be seen that a sub-screen decorative member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when an effect image is emitted forward from projector 500 disposed rearward, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of sub-screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is shielded, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits light, the light can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made less visible. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light.

  The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477 to emit light with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the portion outside the sub-screen decorative member 476 made of a skull-like decoration, and the effect image is displayed. Is decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the luminous decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decorative effect completely different from the luminous decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The sub-screen 472 can be shown to the player, giving the player a strong impact. Also, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the effected image inside the effected image, so that a partially high-intensity effected image that cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to display an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable.

  In the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction while the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500, and is changed from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. When the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, a part of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 that is located within the projection range of the projector 500 when the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating. Then, the effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub-screen 472, a mysterious visual effect in which the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the sub-screen decoration member 476 are rotationally moved on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and entertained the player.

  As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Accordingly, the player can see the decoration with a movement and a three-dimensional effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front and the front in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412). A second effect display device 460A on the door frame side having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated by the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the operation button 410 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decorative board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, a frame top lens decorative board 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472, and the effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is impossible with the conventional pachinko machine, can be presented to the player. , Can give the player a strong impact and entertain.

[3-4h. Overall Configuration of Effect Operation Unit in Third Embodiment]
Next, a third effect operation unit 400B as a third embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 182 to 191. FIG. FIG. 182 is a perspective view seen from the front side of a third effect operation unit different from the effect operation units A and B so far. FIG. 183 is a perspective view from before the cover portion of the third effect operation unit is removed to expose the main portion. FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective view showing a main part of the third effect unit from the front, and shows a state of attachment to the door frame 3. FIG. 185 shows the rotating unit and the driving unit in the third effect unit, and the driving unit is assembled to the rotating unit. FIG. 186 shows the mechanism of the drive unit except for the rotary decorative body. FIG. 187 is a partially exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the driving unit together with the internal structure of the rotating unit. FIG. 188 shows the internal structure of the drive section in a longitudinal section. FIG. 189 schematically illustrates the principle of the one-way rotation clutch mechanism. FIG. 190 is a front view showing a state of a mainspring in a mainspring spring case and an attached state thereof. FIG. 191 is for explaining the positional relationship between the tab, the linear member, and the drive unit.

The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Like the effect operation unit 400, the third effect operation unit 400B can be operated by a player according to the effect provided by the pachinko machine 1 (game machine).
Hereinafter, [1. Overall structure of pachinko machine] to [3-3h. Button for lowering ball] (paragraphs 0107 to 0336) is referred to, and the configuration of effect operation unit 400 [3-4. Overall Configuration of Effect Operation Unit] to [3-f. Operation and Effect of Effect Operation Unit] (paragraphs 0337 to 0418), the same components as those described in the description will be given the same reference numerals.
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) having the third production operation unit 400B is the same as the above except for the characteristic parts of the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A. Will be described in detail, and other portions will be described schematically.

The pachinko machine 1 (FIG. 182) including the third effect unit 400 </ b> B has the outer frame 2, the door frame 3, and the game board 5 (FIGS. 116 and 117) attached to the main body frame 4.
As described above, the game board 5 has a control section related to the progress of the game including the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control unit 1500, and the like, and a movable section such as a back upper movable effect unit 3500. are doing.
The door frame 3 closes the front side of the main body frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and has a window portion through which the game area 5a can be viewed from the front. Around the front surface of the door frame 3, there are left and right door frame left side units 530, a door frame top unit 570, and a plate unit 320 projecting forward below the window.

The third effect operation unit 400B is arranged on the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320, which is one of the positions where the player can visually recognize (FIG. 183).
The third effect operation unit 400B has a rotating section 4000, a driving section 4100 (FIGS. 184 and 185), and a cover section 4200 (FIG. 183), which are attached to the rotating body frame 4001.
The rotator frame 4001 has a mounting substrate 4002 on the front side, and is for fixing the rotary decorative body 4003 to the door frame base 110 of the door frame 3 inside the mounting portion 326a of the plate unit 320, The legs are attached. The front mounting substrate 4002 is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as it goes upward, and its angle is 27 degrees with respect to a vertical line in this embodiment.

The rotating unit 4000 will be described.
The rotating part 4000 includes the rotating body frame 4001 bent and formed in a U-shape and a mounting board 4002 fixed on the front side thereof, and a rotating decorative body 4003 is rotatably supported by the mounting board 4002 (FIG. 185, 186).

On the mounting base 4002, a base block 4004 for rotatably supporting the rotatable decorative body 4003 and storing the rotatable decorative body 4003 is fixed. The base block 4004 has a substantially semicircular storage recess 4005 at the center, and has bearing portions 4006 and 4007 formed on both left and right sides so as to face each other.
A first drive shaft 4008 is rotatably supported by the bearings 4006 and 4007. A passive gear 4009 is fixed to the left end of the first drive shaft 4008, and a disk 4010 is fixed to the center of the first drive shaft 4008 (FIGS. 186, 187). The disk 4010 also has a flywheel function for imparting rotational inertia.
In this embodiment, the rotary decorative body 4003 is a sphere (FIG. 185), has decoration on the surface, and has a light source and various decorative bodies inside. It is attached to the disk 4010 at the position of the storage recess 4005, and is arranged so as not to hinder rotation.
Reference numeral 4011 in the disk 4010 denotes an LED as one of the decorative bodies.
In addition, the rotating decorative body 4003 is not limited to a spherical body, but a solid body composed of a polyhedron is preferable.

In the left bearing part 4006, a second drive shaft 4012 is rotatably supported by a left side wall 4013 of the rotating body frame 4001 by a bearing 4014 in parallel with the first drive shaft 4008. A drive gear 4015 is fixed to the right end of the second drive shaft 4012 on the right side of the side wall 4013. The driving gear 4015 meshes with the passive gear 4009.
An engagement protrusion 4110 is formed on the right end surface of the second drive shaft 4012 (FIG. 188).

The drive unit 4100 is configured inside the casing 4101 and has a tab 4102 (FIG. 184). The casing 4101 is attached to the rotating body frame 4001 together with the rotating section 4000.
A third drive shaft 4103 is disposed inside the casing 4101 so as to penetrate in the left-right direction, and is rotatably supported by left and right bearings 4104, 4105. An engagement groove 4121 is formed on the right end surface of the third drive shaft 4103.
A drive wheel 4106 and a spring 4107 are arranged on the third drive shaft 4103.
The drive wheel 4106 is a wheel having a winding groove 4108 whose outer peripheral surface has a trapezoidal cross section, and is attached to the third drive shaft 4103 via a one-way rotating clutch 4109. The third drive shaft 4103 has an engagement protrusion 4110 projecting leftward at the left end.
The drive wheel 4106 widens the winding groove 4108 so that the linear member 4202 does not become entangled when the linear member 4202 is pulled out and unwound (when the linear member 4202 is stored). A groove corresponding to the linear member 4202 to be formed is formed. Further, a lubricating unit may be provided in order to reduce friction between the linear member 4202 and the driving wheel 4106.

The one-way rotation clutch 4109 has an outer race 4111 and an inner race 4112 as shown in FIG. A plurality of wedge-shaped recesses are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the inner ring 4112 so as to be aligned in one direction of rotation, and a wedge-shaped space 4113 is formed between the inner ring 4112 and the outer ring 4111. A roller 4114 of a roller bearing and an urging spring 4115 are arranged in each of the wedge-shaped spaces 4113. The urging spring 4115 urges each roller 4114 to the side where the wedge-shaped space 4113 becomes narrow.
In this structure, when the outer ring 4111 is rotated to the left as shown by the arrow, the roller 4113 moves to the narrow side of the wedge-shaped space 4113, so that the rotational force (driving force) of the outer ring 4111 is transmitted through the inner ring 4112 to the third drive shaft. When the outer ring 4111 is stopped and the inner ring 4112 rotates leftward, the roller 4114 moves to the wide side of the wedge-shaped space 4113 and rotates (slids), so that the rotational force of the inner ring 4112 is transmitted to the inner ring 4112. The inner wheel 4112 is idled with respect to the outer wheel 4111 without being transmitted to the outer wheel 4111.
The inner ring 4112 of the one-way rotation clutch 4109 is fixed to the third drive shaft 4103. That is, the one-way rotating clutch 4109, the drive wheel 4106, and a linear member 4202 described later constitute a driving unit including a one-way rotating clutch (drawing linear member).

A mainspring 4107 is disposed adjacent to the drive wheel 4106, the inner end of the winding start is fixed to a fixing member on the casing 4101 side, and the outer end is connected to an engaging rod 4116 provided on a side surface of the drive wheel 4106. It is rotatably mounted.
Specifically, the mainspring 4107 (FIG. 190) is housed in a spring case 4117 in the casing 4101. The spring case 4117 is a donut shape in which an annular outer wall 4118, an inner wall 4119, and a bottom wall 4120 are integrally formed by pressing, and one surface side (the drive wheel 4106 side) is open. The mainspring 4107 has an inner end 4107a fixed to the inner side wall 4119 of the spring case 4117, and an outer end 4107b is formed in a small annular shape so that the engaging rod 4116 can be fitted therein. In the spring case 4117, together with the mainspring 4107, the inner wall 4119 is loosely fitted to the third drive shaft 4103, and the outer wall 4118 is fixed to the casing 4101. The casing 4101 is exposed and forms a part forming the outer surface of the dish unit 320.

The drive unit 4100 engages the engagement groove 4121 provided on the right end surface of the third drive shaft 4103 in the drive unit 4100 with the engagement protrusion 4110 located on the left end surface of the second drive shaft 4012 in the rotation unit 4000. And the rotating body frame 4001. The drive gear 4015 is engaged with the passive gear 4009 attached to the left end of the first drive shaft 4008 in the rotating section 4000 (FIG. 185).
The tab 4102 is disposed to face the outlet 4201 provided at the upper front of the casing 4101, and fixes the outer end of the linear member 4202. The inner end of the linear member 4202 is fixed to the drive wheel 4106 through an outlet 4201, and is wound around the winding groove 4108 of the drive wheel 4106 by the action of a mainspring 4107. In this embodiment, the drive wheel 4106 forms a linear member storage section.

  The pulling direction of the puller 4102 (the direction in which the linear member 4202 is pulled) is slightly inclined leftward and downward with respect to the front-back direction line of the plate unit 320 in consideration of the operability of the left hand of the player. is there. Therefore, a guide roller 4203 for guiding the linear member 4202 on the side of the handle 4102 to the winding groove 4108 of the drive wheel 4106 is provided. The guide member is not limited to the roller, and may be a fixed guide member.

  After assembling the driving unit 4100 to the rotating unit 4000, these are fixed to the front surface of the door frame base 110 using the rotating body frame 4001, and then the plate unit 320 is attached. A peripheral decoration ring 4204, a transparent dome-shaped cover 4205, and a holding ring 4206 are attached in this order to the opening on the front side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320, and the interior of the rotary decoration 4003 and the plate unit 320 are shielded. Is done.

  The effect of the pachinko machine 1 progresses to become a player participation effect, and an operation promotion instruction such as "draw a handle" is issued on the game board effect display device 1600, and when the player in response thereto draws the handle, a line is drawn. The drive wheel 4106 is driven by the shaped member 4202, and the first drive shaft 4008 is driven and rotated via the third drive shaft 4103, the second drive shaft 4012, the drive gear 4015, and the passive gear 4009, and the rotary decorative body 4003 is rotated. . On the other hand, when the drive wheel 4106 is rotated by the player, the mainspring spring 4107 is tightly wound through the engagement rod 4116, and energy for storing (winding) the linear member 4202 is accumulated.

When the linear member 4202 is not wound around the drive wheel 4106, the drive wheel 4106 cannot be further rotated. However, a one-way rotating clutch 4109 is disposed between the drive wheel 4106 and the third drive shaft 4103. Therefore, the rotating decorative body 4003 continues to rotate due to inertia.
To return the drawn linear member 4202 to its original position, release the hand or loosen the pulling force, and the linear member 4202 is rotated by the return action of the mainspring spring 4107 so that the driving wheel 4106 is reversed. The member 4202 is rewound. At this time, the function of the one-way rotation clutch 4109 does not stop the rotating decorative body 4003 during rotation. The one-way rotation clutch 4109, the drive wheel 4106 and the mainspring 4107 associated therewith constitute a linear member rewinding device as described above.
The operation of pulling out the linear member 4202 by the handle 4102 is stopped halfway until the entire linear member 4202 is pulled out, and the same operation can be performed even when the linear member 4202 is rewound therefrom.
The drawing and rewinding of the linear member 4202 is not limited to the rotation of the drive wheel 4106, and any structure may be used as long as the drawn and drawn linear member 4202 can be pulled back and stored.

When the handle 4102 is pulled by the player and the rotary decorative body rotates, the decorative pattern applied to the surface of the rotary decorative body 4003 moves, and the movable or fixed decorative body inside the rotary decorative body 4003 is rotated. It is activated by the movement of the contact point due to the rotation of, and changes brilliantly such as blinking and light movement, resulting in a high impact performance. In addition, the time and the rotation speed for maintaining the rotation of the rotary decorative body 4003 can be arbitrarily adjusted and stopped according to the player's intention, so that the player enjoys the game by giving various changes to the operation of the handle 4102. be able to.
For this reason, when the above-mentioned operation promotion instruction is issued at the time of the excitement of the game effect provided by the pachinko machine 1, the operation according to the excitement of the mood is performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Conversely, when the progress of the game is unsatisfactory, the operation promotion instruction is issued when it is desired to seek a change in the game or the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment due to the stagnation mood.

[3-4i. Overall Configuration of Effect Operation Unit in Fourth Embodiment]
FIG. 193 shows a fourth embodiment (fourth effect operation unit 400C) of the effect operation unit.
The fourth effect operation unit 400C includes, in the configuration of the third effect operation unit 400B, a linear member direction detection mechanism described later and a selection effect execution mechanism that executes a game effect according to the detected direction. is there.
A detailed description of the same configuration as that of the third effect operation unit 400B is omitted, and the same reference numerals are used for the same components as necessary.
FIGS. 194 (a), (b), and (c) show the direction of the linear member 4202 (referred to as “linear member direction”) when the player pulls the handle 4102, and the chain line indicates the linear member withdrawal amount. The limit area determined from the direction of the linear member is schematically shown. FIG. 195 shows the positional relationship among the drive wheel 4106 from which the linear member 4202 is pulled out, the linear member direction detecting device 4128, and the tab 4102. FIG. 196 illustrates the relationship between the direction of the linear member and the direction detection switch SW in the linear member direction detection device. FIG. 197 shows the structure of the linear member direction detecting device. FIG. 198 schematically shows a state in which the switches that operate according to the direction of the linear member are different. FIG. 199 is an example of the control unit.

The fourth effect operation unit 400C (FIG. 193) is attached to the center of the front of a plate unit 320 provided on the lower front part of the door frame 3 so as to project toward the player. The fourth effect operation unit 400C has a rotating unit 4000 and a drive unit 4100 inside the plate unit 320, similarly to the third effect operation unit 400B.
On a round window provided in front of the plate unit 320, a rotary decorative body 4003 of the rotary unit 4000 is arranged so as to be visible.
The tab 4102 of the drive unit 4100 is located outside the plate unit 320, and is connected to the drive wheel 4106 and the linear member 4202 inside the plate unit 320.
Then, when the player pulls the handle 4102, the driving unit 4100 and the rotating unit 4000 inside the plate unit 320 are operated, and the rotating decorative body 4003 rotates inside the round window.
A one-way rotating clutch 4109 is interposed between the drive wheel 4106, which is driven to rotate by pulling the pull tab 4102, and the rotary decoration 4003, so that the player stops pulling the pull tab 4102, Even if 4102 is returned, the rotating decorative body 4003 continues to rotate by inertia.

Since the linear member 4202 is flexible and bends in any direction, the direction in which the player can pull the handle 4102 (linear member direction) is centered on the outlet 4201 from the casing 4101 (dish unit 320). Spread to the side of the deformed hemisphere or more (FIG. 194).
That is, FIGS. 194 (a), (b) and (c) show the direction of the linear member 4202 when the player pulls the handle 4102 (referred to as “linear member direction”). A limit region 4207 determined from the amount and the direction of the linear member is schematically shown.

For example, in a horizontal plane area (in plan view) including the outlet 4201, the linear member 4202 can be drawn in a direction represented by the linear member directions A to E in FIG. The left arm and the left wrist of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 are within the range of the possible angles.
For example, the linear member direction A is almost the limit position when the left hand is pulled to the right, and there is a limit to the amount of the linear member 4202 even if there is a margin in the length. The linear member directions B and C are directions taken as a normal pulling operation, and the pull amount is limited because the puller 4102 collides with the player's body side (body side). The linear member direction D is a case where the elbow is extended while the arm is separated from the body side, and the amount of pull is relatively large, and the movement of the arm or the hand is rarely restricted. In this case, some measures such as providing a stopper may be necessary so as not to disturb the next player by pulling too much. In the linear member direction E, the arm and the wrist are moved in the front left lateral direction, so that it is usually in an unreasonable posture while sitting, and the amount of pulling is small.

In the front vertical area (front view) including the outlet 4102, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the linear member direction G is directly below, the linear member direction L is almost directly above, and the linear member direction I is It is right beside. There is a limit to the amount of the draw for the same reason as described above.
194 (c), the linear member direction G is almost directly downward, the linear member direction M is almost directly above, and the linear member direction Q is Directly below. Similar to the above, the direction and the amount of pull are each limited due to the collision with the arm, the wrist, and the body side.
Considering the linear member direction that the player can take, including the linear member direction located in the middle of the directions described above, and the amount of pulling as a whole, the area (limit area) that the puller 4102 can reach is roughly the door A deformed hemisphere bulging from the frame 3 toward the player.
In other words, the player can draw the linear member in the direction he or she wants, although in the deformed hemispherical space (limit area) which is on the left of the front between the pachinko machine 1 and the front of the pachinko machine 1. .

The fourth effect operation unit 400C includes a linear member direction detection device 4128.
The linear member direction detecting device 4128 is disposed at an outlet 4201 that is an outlet of the linear member 4202 in the casing 4101 (FIG. 195), and internally has a plurality of switches SW1 to SW6 in an annular shape.
The plurality of switches SW1 to SW6 are radially arranged and fixed in a groove of a donut-shaped container 4132 (FIG. 197) in which an annular outer wall 4129 and an annular inner wall 4130 are connected by a bottom wall 4131, and an actuator 4133 of each switch SW is provided. It projects from the slit 4134 provided in the annular inner wall 4130 to the inside of the inner wall 4130. A linear member contact piece 4135 is fixed to the protruding tip of each actuator 4133. In this embodiment, the linear member contacting piece 4135 is formed by dividing a short annular tubular strip formed along a circle connecting the tips of the actuators 4133 into six sections and providing an interval therebetween. The interval is smaller than the diameter of the linear member 4202 in this embodiment.

The linear member 4202 connected from the drive wheel 4106 to the handle 4102 usually passes through the center (center line) of the inner wall 4130 of the linear member direction detecting device 4128.
However, depending on the direction in which the linear member 4202 is pulled (FIGS. 196 and 198), the linear member 4202 is deviated from the center line and contacts one of the linear member contact pieces 4235 arranged therearound. One of the switches SW1 to SW6 is turned ON via the actuator 4133 of the above.
The ON signal is processed by the control unit 4300 (FIG. 199) provided in the pachinko machine 1 and a selected game effect corresponding to the switch SW turned ON is performed.

  The control unit 4300 (control means) includes a main control board 4301 and a peripheral control board 4302. The main control MPU 4301a of the main control board 4301 executes the program to control the progress of the game. The main control MPU 4301a is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands for game progress, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. Various commands relating to the state are transmitted to the peripheral control board 4302.

The peripheral control board 4302 has a peripheral control unit 4303 and a liquid crystal / sound control unit 4304. The peripheral control unit 4303 has a peripheral control MPU 4303a as a microprocessor and a peripheral control ROM 4303b for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various schedulers. The liquid crystal / sound control unit 4304 has a VDP 4304a and a character ROM 4304c. The VDP 4304a includes a sound source IC 4303b for performing high-quality sound and a sound control unit 4304b that uses a sound ROM 44303d that stores sound information such as music and sound effects to be referred to. There is a command, signal, and data exchange for peripheral control (such as a sound command) between the peripheral control unit 4303 and the liquid crystal / sound control unit 4304. The peripheral control unit 4303 is a switch provided in the fourth effect operation unit 400C. It has a port to which signals from SW1 to SW6 are transmitted.

  The peripheral control MPU 4303a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and receives various commands from the main control board 4301 via these ports. Upon reception, based on the various commands, a game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is ramped. A game board for transmitting a drive signal from a serial I / O port for a drive board to a lamp drive board 4309 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 Side motor drive data from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 4310, or door side motor drive / light emission data from the frame decoration drive amplifier board serial I / O port to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 4305, and transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 4307 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 4306. Lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided in the fourth effect operation unit 400C in this embodiment, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals, and drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies are also provided. The data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board together with the door side motor drive / light emission data.

  The ON / OFF signals of the switches SW1 to SW6 included in the fourth effect operation unit 400C are the same as the signals from the various substrates mounted on the door frame 3 and include the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 4307 and the peripheral door relay terminal. Either ON or OFF is input to the storage area of each of the switches SW1 to SW6 which is input to the detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4303a via the board 4306 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 4305 and set in the internal RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4303a. Is stored in the state of On the other hand, in the peripheral control ROM 4303b, a selection table for selecting a game effect corresponding to the state of the switches SW1 to SW6 is prepared.

  The sound source IC 4303c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4303d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4303a and is provided on the main body frame 4 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 4305 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 4306. Control is performed so that music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the speaker 821, and provided on the door frame 3 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 4306, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 4307, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 4307. The control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker.

The pachinko machine 1 has a player participation type program in the peripheral control ROM 4303b of the peripheral control unit 4303. The peripheral control MPU 4303a can execute a player participation effect as one of the effects indicating a hit or miss, for example, during the change display of the special symbol.
The player participation effect is executed during the change display of the special symbol when a predetermined effect execution condition for executing the effect is satisfied. Examples of the effect execution condition include, for example, that the execution of the player participation effect is determined by a lottery for determining the type of effect performed when the lottery result is a hit or a loss. It should be noted that the player participation effect may be executed not only during the special symbol change but also at another time during the game progress process (for example, during a big hit game).

When the player participation effect is started, first, an operation promoting unit that prompts the player to operate the fourth effect operation unit 400C of the gaming machine 1 is executed. For example, an operation prompt message of "close" is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device) together with the picture of the puller 4102 by an arrow so that the puller 4102 of the fourth effect operation unit 400C is pulled.
Note that "close" may be transmitted to the player by voice.
Then, when the player who has responded to these operation promoting means pulls the handle 4102, the rotary decoration 4003 in the fourth effect operation unit 400C rotates. At the same time, the drawn linear member 4202 comes into contact with one of the linear member contact pieces 4135 arranged in an annular shape of the linear member direction detecting device 4128 at the outlet from the casing 4101 fixed to the plate unit 320. Then, one of the switches SW1 to SW6 is turned ON via the actuator 4133.
Note that the number of switches SW1 to SW6 is not limited to six. These may be sensors having no mechanical structure.

If the switch SW1 is turned on (FIG. 198B), the signal is recognized by the peripheral control unit 4303 as described above, and a game effect corresponding to the switch SW1 being turned on is selected from the selection table. . Then, the peripheral control unit 4303 transmits a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs in the fourth effect operation unit 400C via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 4305, a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies. And the like to an electric drive source.
The same applies when the other switch SW is turned on (FIG. 198c), but the content of the selected game effect is different in color, sound, movement, or duration. Depending on the direction of the linear member 4202 to be drawn out, it is conceivable that two adjacent linear member contact pieces 4135 are brought into contact with each other and the two switches SW are turned on at the same time. Options such as a game effect in the case of simultaneous ON are prepared.

In addition, since the operation of the handle 4102 by the player is usually not stable, the direction of the linear member 4202 to be drawn out may change in a short time. Although the cycle time of the peripheral control board 4302 is 2 ms, the signals from the switches SW1 to SW6 are held in the internal RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4303a in response to the short-time changes of the switches SW1 to SW6. It is necessary to appropriately set the time during which it is running.
As described above, the linear member direction detection mechanism and the selection effect execution mechanism are configured by the control unit 4300 and the linear member direction detection device 4128 in the fourth effect operation unit 400C.

The player can select the direction of pulling the handle 4102 (the direction of the linear member) almost as desired. Therefore, while playing the game, by changing the drawing direction in various ways, the user can enjoy the change of the color of the light source inside the rotary decoration 4003 and the change of the effect image appearing on the game board effect display 1600 with the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003. be able to.
On the other hand, such an effect participation of the player is associated with the linear member direction and a special time such as a jackpot execution standby time, in which case a specific linear member direction (switch SW) is selected. For example, when a sign (for example, one of the holding indications that are consecutive winning indications shines) is produced, the player feels as if the operation of the player has changed the holding status to the winning. .
As described above, when the game effect of the pachinko machine 1 is associated with the player's advantageous progress, it is effective for the player to operate in the deformable hemispherical limit area (described above). It becomes possible to find out whether or not the player is immersed in the player-participation effect, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Note that, as described above, the limit area in which the player can operate the pull tab 4102 is roughly a deformed hemisphere that expands toward the player, and thus the player can operate the pull tab 4102 in various modes.
For example, in addition to simply pulling the linear member 4202, in a state in which the linear member 4202 is pulled out, it is rotated around the outlet 4201 so as to draw a circle or a figure 8 in front view, or reciprocates in a certain direction. It moves or performs a whirling operation that gradually changes its reciprocating direction. The rotation operation and the whirling operation include forward rotation and reverse rotation.
The manner in which the switches SW1 to SW6 are turned ON / OFF by such an operation is peculiar to each other, and the difference is determined by the control unit 4300 to perform a corresponding effect, thereby attracting the player's interest in the game. it can.
And, the above-mentioned rotation operation and whirling operation make the player's motion large and conspicuous, so it attracts attention in the hall and attracts other players to the model.

In addition, when the player pulls the handle 4102, the resistance is small when the effect of the pachinko machine 1 is developed in an advantageous manner to the player, otherwise, the condition is such that advantageous development cannot be expected. Can be implicitly notified to the player. This situation may appear only in a specific linear member direction.
Alternatively, a simple power generation function is provided in the driving unit 4100, and when the linear member 4202 is pulled and the driving wheel 4106 is rotated, there is power generation according to the speed and the amount of pull when the linear member 4202 is pulled. In this way, the power generation amount can be displayed in a gauge storage effect on a display device provided on the front surface of the plate unit 320.

[3-4j. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit in Fifth Embodiment]
FIG. 200 shows the position of the fifth effect operation unit 400D in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 201 mechanically shows the basic structure of the fifth embodiment (fifth effect operation unit 400D) of the effect operation unit. FIG. 202 shows a main part of the fifth effect operation unit 400D as a mechanism. FIG. 203 is a mechanism diagram showing a mode of the vertical operation. FIG. 204 shows a main part of the fifth effect operation unit 400D as a mechanism. FIG. 205 is a mechanism diagram showing a mode of the left-right operation.

The fifth effect operation unit 400D is characterized by the configuration of the rotating unit 4000 with respect to the fourth effect operation unit 400C, and is rotated and decorated according to the linear member direction detected by the linear member direction detection mechanism. A rotation direction changing mechanism for changing the rotation direction of the body 4003 is provided.
Hereinafter, detailed description of the same configuration as that of the fourth effect operation unit 400C will be omitted, and the same reference numerals will be used for the same components as necessary.

The fifth effect operation unit 400D (FIG. 200) is attached to the center of the front surface of a plate unit 320 provided on the lower front part of the door frame 3 so as to project toward the player. Then, the rotating unit 4000 and the driving unit 4100 are provided inside the dish unit 320 (FIGS. 184 and 185).
On a round window provided in front of the plate unit 320, a rotary decorative body 4003 of the rotary unit 4000 is arranged so as to be visible.
The tab 4102 of the drive unit 4100 is located outside the plate unit 320, and is connected to the drive wheel 4106 inside the plate unit 320 by a linear member 4202 (FIG. 191).

In the fifth production operation unit 400D, the rotating section 4000 includes the rotating body frame 4001 bent and formed in a U-shape and a mounting board 4002 fixed on the front side thereof, and the rotating decorative body 4003 is three-dimensionally mounted on the mounting board 4002. It is rotatably supported via a rotation direction changing mechanism that changes the rotation direction by changing the rotation direction (FIG. 201). Note that the rotary decorative body 4003 is decorated on the surface and has a light source and various decorative bodies under the control of the peripheral control unit 4303 inside.
The rotation direction changing mechanism passes through the sphere center Q of the rotating decorative body 4003 which is a sphere in the embodiment, and the axis in the left-right direction as viewed from the player is x, the axis in the front-rear direction is y, and the axis in the up-down direction is z. In this case, there are provided a Z frame 4017 rotated about the z axis, a Y frame 4018 rotated about the y axis, and a whirling axis 4136 in the drive unit 4100.
The x-axis is the axis of the first drive shaft 4008, and the rotary decoration 4003 is fixed to the first drive shaft 4008 with its sphere center Q on the x-axis. Therefore, when the first drive shaft 4008 rotates, the rotary decorative body 4003 also rotates.
The combination of the Z frame 4017 and the Y frame 4018 corresponds to the base block 4004 in the fourth effect unit 400C.

The Z frame 4017 has a U-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a horizontal portion (Z horizontal portion) 4019, a left vertical portion (Z vertical portion) 4020 rising from both ends, and a right vertical portion 4021. A Z rotation shaft 4022 is provided at the longitudinal center of the Z lateral portion. The left Z vertical portion 4020 is provided with a bearing (left Z bearing 4023), and the right Z vertical portion 4021 is provided with a bearing (right Z bearing 4024). The left Z bearing 4023 corresponds to the left bearing part 4006 in the fourth effect operation unit 400C, and the right Z bearing 4024 corresponds to the right bearing part 4007.
The Y frame 4018 is composed of a horizontal portion (Y horizontal portion) 4025 and a vertical portion (Y vertical portion) 4026 rising at a right angle at the rear end, and supports the Z rotation shaft 4022 at the tip of the Y horizontal portion 4025. ing. The Y vertical portion 4026 is provided with a Y bearing 4027, and a Y frame 4018 is mounted on the mounting substrate 4002 of the rotator frame 4001 so as to be rotatable about the shaft 4027.

The Z frame 4017 and the Y frame 4018 are assembled with the Z rotation shaft 4022. A rotating decorative body (sphere) 4003 is arranged in a space surrounded by the left Z vertical portion 4020, the right Z vertical portion 4021, and the Y vertical portion 4026.
The rotary decorative body 4003 is supported by the first drive shaft 4008 which is supported by the Z bearings 4023 and 4024 of the left and right vertical Z portions 4019 and 4020, and is fixed to this shaft. The axis x of the first drive shaft 4008, the axis y passing through the Y bearing 4027 provided in the Y vertical portion, and the axis z of the Z rotary shaft 4022 intersect at the spherical center Q of the rotary decorative body 4003.

Therefore, the combined Z frame 4017 and Y frame 4018 rotate around the axis y so as to move up and down on the left and right ends of the Z frame 4017. It is possible to rotate around the axis so that the left and right ends move back and forth. The center of rotation between the left-right rotation and the front-back rotation is the sphere center Q.
When this is viewed at the left end of the second drive shaft 4012 arranged in parallel with the first drive shaft 4008 and supported by the left vertical Z portion 4020, the trajectory becomes a disk shape as shown in FIG. The circumference and the area inside the circumference are the range where the left end of the second drive shaft 4012 is located.

A Z sector gear 4028 that rotates about the Z axis is fixed to a Z rotation shaft 4022 of the Z frame 4017, and a Z pinion gear 4029 meshes with the Z sector gear 4028 (FIG. 202). The Z pinion gear 4029 is attached to a fixed position of the Y lateral portion 4025 of the Y frame 4018, and is driven by the motor ZM.
A Y sector gear 4030 that rotates about the y axis is fixed to a Y vertical portion 4026 of the Y frame 4018, and a Y pinion gear 4031 meshes with the Y sector gear 4030 (FIG. 204). The Y pinion gear 4031 is pivotally supported at a fixed position on the mounting board 4022, and is driven by a motor YM.
The driving of the motor ZM and the motor YM is under the control of the control unit 4300, and a driving instruction is issued by the peripheral control unit 4303.

  A passive gear 4009 is fixed to the left end of the first drive shaft 4008. A second drive shaft 4012 is axially supported on the left vertical portion 4020 of the Z frame 4017 in parallel with the first drive shaft 4008, and a drive gear 4015 is fixed to the right end. The drive gear 4015 always meshes with the passive gear 4009. At the left end of the second drive shaft 4012, a part of a right universal joint 4032 described later is formed.

The drive unit 4100 is the same as that of the fourth effect operation unit 400C, and is configured inside the casing 4101 and has a handle 4102 (FIG. 184). The casing 4101 is attached to the rotating body frame 4001 together with the rotating section 4000.
A third drive shaft 4103 is disposed inside the casing 4101 so as to penetrate in the left-right direction, and is rotatably supported by left and right bearings 4104, 4105. The right end of the third drive shaft 4103 forms a part of the left universal joint 4033.
A spring 4107 for rewinding the drive wheel 4106 and the drawn linear member 4202 is disposed inside the spring case 4117 on the third drive shaft 4103. Further, the drive wheel 4106 is attached to the third drive shaft 4103 via a one-way rotating clutch 4109, so that even if the player stops pulling the handle 4102 or returns the handle 4102, the rotary decorative body 4003 has an inertia. Keep turning around.

FIG. 189 shows the principle structure of the one-way rotation clutch 4109. The one-way rotation clutch 4109 is wound when the linear member 4202 is pulled, and is loosened when the linear member 4202 is loosened. The drive wheel 4106 is reversely rotated by the force to rewind the linear member 4202 to the peripheral surface of the drive wheel 4106.
That is, the driving unit 4100 including the one-way rotating clutch (the drawing line-shaped member) includes the one-way rotating clutch 4109, the drive wheel 4106, and a linear member 4202 described later.
The tab 4102 is disposed to face the outlet 4201 provided at the upper front of the casing 4101, and fixes the outer end of the linear member 4202. The inner end of the linear member 4202 is fixed to the drive wheel 4106 through an outlet 4201, and is wound around the winding groove 4108 of the drive wheel 4106 by the action of a mainspring 4107.

The left end of the second drive shaft 4012 of the rotating unit 4000 and the right end of the third drive shaft 4103 of the drive unit 4100 are connected to both ends by a swivel shaft 4136 that forms a universal joint 4032, 4033.
The whirling shaft 4136 has a connection portion with the right end of the third drive shaft 4103 at a fixed rotation position P, and a connection portion with the left end of the second drive shaft 4012 at a rotational rotation position (for example, Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd or inside thereof) (FIG. 201). For this reason, the whirling shaft 4136 can expand and contract in the axial direction, and both ends thereof are configured as universal joints 4032 and 4033.

The fifth effect operation unit 400D includes a linear member direction detection device 4128.
The linear member direction detecting device 4128 is the same as that of the fourth effect operation unit 400C, and is disposed at an outlet 4201 of the casing 4101 which is an outlet of the linear member 4202 (FIG. 195). These switches SW1 to SW6 are provided in a ring shape, and when one of the switches SW1 to SW6 is turned ON, it is possible to detect in which direction the linear member 4202 is pulled (linear member direction). The ON signal of the switch SW is processed by the control unit 4303 of the control unit 4300 (FIG. 199) included in the pachinko machine 1, and a selection game effect corresponding to the switch SW turned ON by the control unit 4303 is performed. By the program provided in the peripheral control ROM, the motor ZM and the motor YM are driven in response to the switch SW being turned on, and the rotation direction (direction of the first drive shaft 4008) of the rotary decoration 4003 is changed.

For example, when the switch SW1 is selected, the peripheral control unit 4303 recognizing the switch SW1 drives the motor YM to rotate the pinion 4031, and rotates the Y frame 4018 rightward about the y axis via the sector gear 4030. . Then, the Z frame 4017 assembled with the Z rotation shaft 4022 rotates clockwise in front view (FIG. 205), the first drive shaft 4008 and the second drive shaft 4012 are inclined, and the left end of the second drive shaft 4012 Is the position of Ra (FIG. 201).
The tilt angle of the Z frame 4017, that is, the angle at which the first drive shaft 4008 and the second drive shaft 4012 can be tilted depends on the setting in the program, but the direction is determined by the right universal joint 4032 and the left universal joint 4033. To the limit of the ability to transmit rotation between different shafts.
When the switch SW4 is selected, the same as described above, but the motor YM rotates in the reverse direction to rotate the first drive shaft 4008 counterclockwise, and sets the left end of the second drive shaft 4012 to the position of Rc.

When the switches SW2 and SW3 are simultaneously turned on, the motor ZM is driven. Then, the Y frame 4018 maintains the position at that time, and the Z frame 4017 is rotated back and forth about the Z rotation shaft 4022. When the rotational position of the Y frame 4018 is vertical, the direction of rotation of the Z frame 4017 is forward and backward on the horizontal plane. Therefore, when the switches SW2 and SW3 are simultaneous, the left end of the second shaft 4012 is at the position of Rd.
When the switches SW5 and SW6 are operated at the same time, the operation is the same as described above, but the motor ZM rotates in the reverse direction, and the left end of the second shaft 4012 is at the position of Rb.
When only the switch SW2 is turned on, the motor YM and the motor ZM are simultaneously driven, and the left end of the second drive shaft 4012 is at the Rx position which is intermediate between the Ra position and the Rb position. The rotation direction and the rotation amount of the motor YM and the motor ZM are determined by the horizontal projection line angle α (motor ZM) and the vertical projection line angle β (motor YM) of the line connecting the sphere center Q and the Rx position of the rotary decoration 4003. Is determined by The same applies to the switches SW3, SW5, and SW6.

The control unit 4300 includes (a control unit) a main control board 4301 and a peripheral control board 4302. The configuration is such that the state of the switches SW1 to SW6 and the rotation direction of the rotary decorative body 4003 corresponding to the switches SW1 to SW6 are selected in the peripheral control ROM 4303b. Although there is a difference in that a program to be executed is stored, it is used because it is the same as the case of the fourth effect operation unit 400C as a whole.
In short, the pachinko machine 1 has a player participation type program in the peripheral control ROM 4303b of the peripheral control unit 4303, and is executed when a predetermined effect execution condition for executing the program is satisfied. As in the case of the fourth production operation unit 400C, the production execution conditions include, for example, the execution of the player participation production in the lottery for determining the type of the production to be performed when the lottery result is a hit or a loss. That is to be determined.

When the player participation effect is started, first, an operation promoting unit that prompts the player to operate the fifth effect operation unit 400D of the gaming machine 1 is executed. For example, an operation promotion message of “close” is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device) together with the picture of the handle 4102 by an arrow so as to pull the handle 4102 of the fifth effect operation unit 400D.
Then, when the player who has reacted to these operation promoting means pulls the handle 4102, the third drive shaft 4103 of the drive unit 4100 in the fifth effect operation unit 400D is rotated, and the whirling shaft 4136, the second drive shaft 4012, and the The rotary decoration 4003 rotates via one drive shaft 4008. At the same time, the drawn linear member 4202 is connected to one of the linear member contact pieces 4135 arranged annularly of the linear member direction detecting device 4128 at the outlet 4201 from the casing 4101 fixed to the plate unit 320. Then, one of the switches SW1 to SW6 is turned on.
Then, the first drive shaft 4008 of the rotary decoration 4003 is tilted according to the position of the switch SW that has been turned ON, and the rotation direction of the rotary decoration 4003 is selected in various ways.
At this time, although the third drive shaft 4103 and the second drive shaft 4012 in the drive unit 4100 have different axial directions, they are connected by a swivel shaft 4136 having both ends as universal joints. Can be transmitted to the second drive shaft 4012. Then, the drive gear 4015 attached to the second drive shaft 4012 drives the passive gear 4009, so that the first drive shaft 4008 rotates.

The rotary decoration 4003 rotates inside a round window provided in the plate unit 320.
In the case of the fifth effect operation unit 400D, as shown in FIG. 206, a band region 4034 is set on the surface of the rotary decorative body 4003, and a large number of LED lines 4035 are provided in this region 4034 in a direction transverse to the direction of the band. Are located. Each LED line 4035 is formed by arranging small color LEDs 4036 in a linear manner (FIG. 206 [b]).
The band region 4034 is set so as to make one round along the equator of the rotation axis (first drive shaft 4008) of the rotary decorative body 4003. In this embodiment, the LED lines 4035 are arranged at intervals of 5 ° on the equator. And 72 are arranged.
Further, the rotary decoration 4003 has a blinking device 4037 and a flash switch 4038 inside.

The blinking device 4037 is configured by combining a timer and a switch. Of the LED lines 4035, a plurality of the LED lines 4035 (for example, 24 of the 72 LED lines at 15 ° intervals) are collectively arranged in units of LED lines 4035. , And flickers every set predetermined time t.
FIG. 207 is for explaining how the plurality of LED lines 4035 which are positioned and illuminated at the fixed intervals look to the player according to the rotation speed of the rotary decoration 4003 in this situation. .
FIG. 207 shows a situation in which the LED line 4035 at the [A] position moves to the [B] position, where d0 is the interval between the plurality of LED lines 4035 positioned at the fixed interval and t is the set time. Then, when the rotation speed (d0 / t) of the rotating decorative body 4003 and the set time t are in a synchronized state, when the rotating speed of the rotating decorative body 4003 is faster than the synchronized state, and conversely, when it is slower than the synchronized state. Three are described.
Here, the state where the rotation speed (d0 / t) and the set time t are in a synchronized state is a state in which the distance (on the equator) when the rotating decorative body 4003 rotates in the time t is the constant interval d0.

In FIG. 207, in the case of the synchronous state, the LED line 4035 illuminated at the point [A] moves (d0) to the point [B] after t time and is lit, but the after-image immediately before at the point [B] is Since they overlap, the player can see that the LED line 4035 at the point [A] has stopped. Since this occurs in all the LED lines 4035 that are turned on at the same time at the same interval, the ring-shaped LED lines 4035 are formed on the peripheral surface of the rotary decoration 4003 despite the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003. Appears to stop.
When the rotation speed of the rotary decorative body 4003 is faster than the synchronous state (Δt), the LED line 4035 lit at the point [A] is a position (d1) after t hours ahead of the point [B] by Δd corresponding to the Δt. Is lit. Therefore, the player sees the LED line 4035 shifted by Δd, and the shift increases as the rotation speed of the rotary decoration 4003 increases, so that the linear member 4202 is pulled to increase the speed of the rotary decoration 4003. Then, the ring shape appears to rotate slowly on the surface of the rotary decorative body 4003 in the traveling direction.
Conversely, when the time is later than the synchronization state (Δt), the LED line 4035 lit at the point [A] is lit at a position (d2) retracted from the point [B] by Δd corresponding to the Δt after the time t. Is done. Therefore, the player sees the LED line 4035 at a position retracted by Δd, and the deviation increases as the rotation of the rotary decorative body 4003 is slowed down. Appears to rotate slowly in the retreating direction on the surface of the rotary decorative body 4003.
The flash switch 4038 turns on a flash lamp 4039 disposed inside the rotary decoration 4003, and turns on the flash lamp 4039 at the time of “synchronization” described later.

Specifically, in the player participation effect of the pachinko machine 1, when the player pulls the pull, the rotating decorative body 4003 rotates, and the lit LED line 4035 of the band area 4034 also rotates.
At this time, when the interval between the LED lines 4035 is 15 °, when the rotation speed of the rotary decorative body 4003 is 15 ° / t, the set time t and the time for the LED lines 4035 to move through the set interval coincide ( Synchronize). Then, although the LED line 4035 is moving, the timing at which the LED line 4035 shines and the position of the LED line 4035 match, and each shining LED line 4035 appears to stop. When the rotation speed is higher (faster) than 15 ° / t, the LED line 4035 appears to proceed in the rotation direction of the rotary decoration 4003, and when the rotation speed is lower than 15 ° / t, it retreats. Looks like it goes.
Note that since this situation also appears at a position where the rotation speed of the rotary decoration 4003 is a multiple of 15 °, the LED line 4035 moves ahead or retreats from a position where it appears to stop during rotation of the rotary decoration 4003. I can do it.
Then, the above-mentioned state in which the LED line 4035 is stopped is determined by the amount of light received by the photoelectric switch provided in the flash switch 4038, and the flash lamp 4039 inside the rotary decoration 4003 is turned on.

For example, when the production state of the player participation production is hot, the player who has rotated the rotary decorative body 4003 in response to the operation promotion instruction of “drawing the pull handle” has the LED line 4035 leading or retreating. After a while, it comes to a stop state, and at that time, the flash lamp 4039 is turned on, and the rotating decorative body 4003 shines greatly.
The LED line 4035 may be not only a straight line but also a curve, a simple picture, or a character.

By changing the time t set in the blinking device 4037 to change the rotation speed of the rotary decorative body 4003 leading to the synchronization, or changing the number of LED lines 4035 to be blinked simultaneously, You can change the number of pictures and patterns.
If the band area 4034 is formed on a dot surface by LEDs in which small LEDs are arranged vertically and horizontally, and the blinking device 4037 is not blinking in units of lines, but, for example, a character is represented as one dot unit of one LED, When the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003 is fast, characters that could not be read can be identified at the time of synchronization, and a simple message can be transmitted.
When the message is advantageous to the player and the flash lamp 4039 is turned on, the player is stimulated by the atmosphere and proceeds with the game with expectation.

  As described above, since the rotation direction of the rotating decorative body 4003 can be changed, it is possible to change the color of the LED line 4035 or change the mode (for example, a picture at the time of synchronization) of the LED line 4035 according to the rotating direction. it can. Also, in the case where the rotating decorative body 4003 has rotation directions of N01, N02, and N03, a request to start the rotation of N01 as a player participation effect, and to shift to the rotation of N02 when the flash fires, and when the flash fires, Further, it is possible to encourage the rotation of N03, and to set an advantageous effect for the player together with the flash when this is achieved, so that the player can be drawn into the player participation effect.

Since the linear member 4202 is flexible and bends in any direction, the direction in which the player can pull the handle 4102 (linear member direction) is centered on the outlet 4201 from the casing 4101 (dish unit 320). To the side of the user (FIG. 194). Although within this range (limit area), the player can pull the linear member 4202 in a direction desired by the player, turn on any of the switches SW1 to SW6, and select the rotation direction of the rotary decoration 4003. .
Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by variously operating the pull handle so as to achieve the above-mentioned setting, expecting an advantageous effect.

  Further, a simple electromagnetic brake is attached to the third drive shaft 4103 so that a certain resistance is applied to the linear member 4202 when the rotation direction of the rotary decorative body 4003 is specific. If the resistance of the linear member is made strong or conversely light when the game effect becomes hot, the player memorizes such a special feeling. Then, if the resistance is large when the next time the pull is pulled, the sense of expectation that the jackpot is close will be increased, and the game will be excitingly advanced.

  A large number of individual patterns (human faces, animals, dolls, etc.) are arranged on the surface of the rotating decorative body 4003 in a miscellaneous manner, and the handle 4102 is operated to illuminate a specific pattern, for example, from the inside. Can be stored in a certain area on the front. For this purpose, it is necessary to operate the handle 4102 variously to first find a target picture, and to arrange the picture in the predetermined area. The operation is rather difficult without pulling the linear member 4202 and concentrating in the direction of the linear member. However, if the operation is successful, the sense of achievement is large. Further, if the effect as the pachinko machine 1 is made to be advantageous to the player in accordance with this, the sense of expectation regarding this operation is increased.

  The third effect operation unit 400B to the fifth effect operation unit 400D have been described above. These are all structures in which the rotary member 4003 is rotated by pulling the linear member 4202 by the handle 4102. In this case, as shown in FIG. 195, the tab 4102 is attached to the tip of the linear member 4202 wound on the drive wheel 4106, and is provided at the tip of the tab 4102 when the linear member 4202 is wound. The recess 4208 (FIG. 208) fits into an annular projection 4209 (FIG. 208) formed around the outlet 4201 of the casing 4101.

  With this structure, when the recess at the tip of the handle 4102 and the annular projection are fitted well, the handle 4102 is in the correct position (FIG. 185) perpendicular to the casing 4101. However, if the user pulls his / her hand off the pull tab 4102 after pulling the pull tab 4102, the pull tab 4102 approaches the casing 4101 while hanging on the linear member 4202, and the front end face of the pull tab 4102 is annular as shown in FIG. It is in a state of contacting the edge of the projection 4209 from below.

  In this case, from the relationship of the moment shown in FIG. 209, the pulling force of the rewinding spring 4107 (FIG. 188) of the drive wheel 4106 (need to be larger than P in FIG. 209) causes the puller 4102 to move horizontally. , The recess 4208 and the annular projection 4209 cannot be fitted. In FIG. 209, point A is the contact point between the linear member 4202 and the tab 4102 (substantially at the center of the front end face), point B is the contact point between the annular projection 4209 and the front end face of the tab 4102, and point G is the tab 4102. And the moment m · d1 = M · d2. P indicates a force along the longitudinal direction of the linear member 4202.

If the spring force of the mainspring 4107 is made sufficiently large, it is possible to rotate the handle 4102 until it is horizontal, and at the same time, to pull it in and fit it in. However, when the player pulls, the resistance is too strong, When released, the handle 4102 is repelled and becomes dangerous.
On the other hand, if the handle 4102 is in a state of waiting for an operation in a hanging state as shown in FIG. 208, it is difficult to operate the next operation chance, and the appearance may be sloppy and hinder a sense of tension in the game.
The sixth effect operation unit 400E according to the next embodiment is intended to solve this problem, and has an object to provide an effect operation unit in which a handle 4102 to be operated always stays at a predetermined position with respect to a casing 4101. I have. Hereinafter, the structure of the drive unit 4100, particularly the relationship between the handle 4102 and the casing 4101 (handle structure) will be described, and the other configurations employ the configurations in the third effect operation unit 400B to the fifth effect operation unit 400D.

[3-4k. Sixth Embodiment of Production Operation Unit)
FIG. 210 shows a drive unit 4100 of the sixth embodiment (sixth effect operation unit 400E) of the effect operation unit, which includes a cover 4200 and a pull tab 4102.
In this embodiment, the cover portion 4200 has a guide protrusion 4210 around the outlet 4201 of the linear member 4202, and the handle 4102 is formed integrally with the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 in the front-rear direction at right angles to the rear end thereof. The grip portion 4138 forms a pull structure.

The guide protrusion 4210 is a protrusion protruding forward from the front of the outlet 4201 formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 4211 of the cover portion 4200, and is paired up and down or left and right at 180 ° intervals. (FIGS. 211, 212).
A guide oblique side 4139 (4139a, 4139b) is cut at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 of the handle 4102. That is, as shown in FIG. 212, the two straight cuts 4140a and 4140b are cut from the [a] position to the [b] position with a phase of 180 ° from the end face of the cylindrical wall, and the rear end of one straight cut 4140a A guide oblique side 4139a is formed from the [a] position to the front end [b] position of the other straight cut 4140b. Similarly, a guide oblique side 4139b is formed from the rear end of the other straight cut 4140b to the front end of the one straight cut b.

The distance from the [a] position to the [b] position of the two straight cuts 4140a and 4140b is the same, and the guide oblique sides 4139a and 4139b are oblique sides, but are at positions [a] to [b] along the cylinder. To form a spiral curved surface. When the cylinder is turned into a plane, the guide hypotenuse 4139 becomes an inclined surface as shown in FIG. As will be described later, the tip of the guide protrusion 4210 abuts on the guide slope 4139.
A guide cone 4144 (FIG. 211) is integrally formed inside the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 of the tab 4102 along the center line. The guide cone 4144 has a narrow and long cone shape in which the front side (the drive wheel 4106 side) is thin and the front side (the handle 4102 side) is thick. a) Projected sufficiently from the position. It is preferable that the guide cone 4144 has a hardness of about a tube made of silicone rubber, a slidability, and an elasticity of being bent when pressed.

A guide hole 4212 that connects the outlet 4201 and the inside of the cover 4200 in which the drive wheel 4106 is accommodated is formed inside the cylindrical protrusion 4211 of the cover 4200. The guide hole 4212 can be entered.
The grip 4138 of the handle 4102 is hollow and has a push button 4141 on the right side (FIG. 214) and a board 4142 (LED board) provided with an LED inside, and a simple operation for switching by operating the button 4141 and switching the LED. Control box 4143.

In the above-described pull structure, when the pull 4102 is pulled, the linear member 4202 is pulled, the drive wheel 4106 rotates, and the rotary decorative body 4003 of the rotary unit 4000 rotates. At the same time, the mainspring 4107 of the driving unit 4100 is wound and the bias for rewinding is accumulated.
When the operation of pulling the linear member 4202 is stopped and the tab 4102 is returned, the linear member 4202 is rewound by the bias of the spring 4107. Along with this, the tab 4102 is also drawn toward the cover 4200, and the guide cone 4144 is first drawn into the guide hole 4212 of the cylindrical projection 4211 in the cover 4200. Then, the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 comes into contact with the guide protrusion 4210.

  Up to this point, the tab 4102 is pulled in with a gentle conical surface (inclined surface) of the guide cone 4144 in contact with the edge of the outlet 4201, so that the tab 4102 is pulled straight without any step. For this reason, unlike the related art, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the tab 4102 hangs down from the edge of the cylindrical projection 4211 to form a large step, and the tab 4102 remains hanging as described above.

  Then, the guide oblique side 4139 of the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 comes into contact with the guide protrusion 4210 of the cylindrical protrusion portion 4211. When the linear member 4202 is still pulled in by the mainspring spring 4107 from this state, the acting force P0 due to the drawing generates a radial force P1 and an axial (front-rear) force P2 as shown in FIG. The force P1 rotates the cylindrical shaft portion 4137. This rotation occurs until the guide protrusion 4210 slides on the guide oblique sides 4139a and 4139b and reaches the front end [b] position of the straight cuts 4140a and 4140b.

Therefore, when the rotation stops, the tab 4102 always stops at a constant rotation position. For example, if this is set at a position where the grip portion 4138 is horizontal, even if the hand is released, the puller 4102 is always in a horizontal position by the retraction bias of the spring 4107 (FIG. 214).
Even if the guide protrusion 4210 abuts on the intermediate portion of the guide oblique side 4139, the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 rotates until the guide protrusion 4210 reaches the position [b]. Even if it is released, it will be in the horizontal posture when the retraction is completed.
As described above, according to this pull structure, the drawn pull 4102 always waits for the next operation in a predetermined posture after the operation by the player is completed, and the appearance of the gaming machine is improved.

In the above-described handle structure, when the player separates the handle 4102 far from the outlet 4201, the retraction force of the mainspring 4107 exerts momentum, and the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 strongly collides with the guide protrusion 4210 and rebounds. Conceivable. In order to avoid this, the base of the guide protrusion 4210 or the base or the entirety of the guide oblique side 4139 of the cylindrical shaft 4137 is made of a low-rebound material such as hard rubber.
Note that a lubricant is applied or a material with good slip is used to improve the sliding between the tip of the guide protrusion 4210 and the guide oblique side 4139.

  In the above-described handle structure, when the handle 4102 is accommodated in the cover portion 4200, the guide protrusion 4210 fits into the triangular concave portion formed by the guide oblique side 4139 and the linear cut 4140 at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 4137. Therefore, when pulling the handle 4102, the grip 4138 of the handle 4102 cannot be freely rotated until the guide projection 4210 comes out of the concave portion. For this reason, the handle 4102 cannot be pulled after being turned, so that in order to avoid this, the guide projection 4210 projects radially outward of the outlet 4201 when the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 of the handle 4102 comes into contact. However, when the tip of the guide projection 4210 reaches the position [b], which is the innermost part of the straight cut 4140, the guide protrusion 4210 is moved toward the center of the outlet 4201 and is pulled in, so that the cylindrical shaft 4137 that has entered the cylindrical shaft 4137 has entered. It may be a structure that fits inside.

According to this outlet structure, when the tab 4102 is stored in the cover 4200,
Since the guide projection 4210 only comes into contact with the inner surface of the cylindrical shaft portion 4137, there is no problem in rotating the tab 4102 on the spot. The projection of the guide projection 4210 is performed by a spring, and the retraction to the center side can be realized by a structure such as rotating a disc groove cam. In this case, the disc groove cam is rotated by a motor driven by a switch ON when the guide projection 4210 reaches the position [b].

FIG. 215 shows another structure of the handle, which is another configuration example (handle structure) for always keeping the posture of the handle 4102 constant (for example, the grip portion 4138 is horizontal) when the handle 4102 is returned.
In this pull structure, a guide cone 4144 is formed to be long from the front end face of the cylindrical shaft portion 4137 of the pull handle 4102, and its cross section is changed from a small circle (s5) almost equal to the diameter of the linear member at the tip as shown in FIG. The size is gradually increased toward the side and a flat ellipse (s1). The minor axis of the ellipse s1 is larger than the minor axis or the diameter of the s2 to s5. The guide cone 4144 preferably has the same hardness and elasticity as the silicone rubber tube as described above.

  On the other hand, the guide hole 4212 of the cylindrical projecting portion 4211 of the cover portion 4200 has a cross-sectional shape having an elliptical hole 4212a that is slightly larger than the cross-sectional shape of the guide cone 4144 at the s1 point closest to the outlet 4201. is there. It is a horizontal section having a width of the minor axis of the ellipse s1 in the axial direction, and has a shape along the tapered shape of the guide cone 4144 in the vertical section. The peripheral wall of the outlet 4201, which is the outlet of the guide hole 4212, has a smooth curved surface toward the ellipse s1.

In this pull structure, after the pull 4102 is pulled and operated, when the pull 4102 is released, as the linear member 4202 is wound around the drive wheel 4106, the long guide cone 4144 is drawn into the outlet 4201 from the thin tip side. It is. At this time, when the major axis directions of the elliptical cross section of the guide hole 4212 and the elliptical cross section of the guide cone 4144 do not match, the major axis of the guide cone 4144 is changed to the elliptical shape of the guide hole 4202 as the linear member 4202 is wound. The tab 4102 is rotated along the cross section. Since the major axis direction of the elliptical cross section of the guide hole 4212 provided in the cover part 4200 does not change, the rotation direction position of the guide cone 4144 when the major axis matches the major axis direction, that is, the posture of the grip part 4138 in the tab 4102 is set to be horizontal. Then, when the handle 4102 is returned, the grip portion 4138 is always horizontal.
Therefore, even with this pull structure, the drawn pull 4102 always waits for the next operation in a predetermined posture after the operation by the player is completed, and the appearance of the gaming machine is improved.
In this pull structure, the guide cone 4144 has elasticity and can be twisted, and a relatively large margin can be created between the outlet 4201 and the guide cone 4144 if the guide cone 4144 is slightly pulled out. Since the grip portion 4138 can be rotated from the beginning, there is no concern that the rotation is hindered at the beginning of the drawer as described above.

The sixth effect operation unit 400E having the above-described handle structure can be developed as shown in FIGS. 216 and 217.
In this embodiment, a generator 4040 (rotation speed sensor) and a brake device 4145 are provided in the structure of the rotating unit 4000 and the driving unit 4100 shown in FIG. The button 4141, the internal LED board 4142, the control box 4143, and the flashing device 4037 and the flash switch 4038 (FIG. 217) arranged outside the rotary decoration 4003 are associated with each other.

The generator 4040 is attached to the shaft (first drive shaft 4008) of the rotary decorative body 4003, and generates electric power according to the rotation of the rotary decorative body 4003. The brake device 4145 is a kind of electromagnetic brake, and is configured to enlarge one flange of the drive wheel 4106 and sandwich the periphery thereof. The brake device 4145 has a structure in which when excited, the brake shoe comes into contact with the enlarged portion of the flange to exert a braking force.
In the band area 4034 of the rotary decorative body 4003, small LEDs are arranged in a plane in this embodiment, and each of them is connected to a blinking device 4037.

When the effect of the pachinko machine 1 is a player participation effect, an operation prompting instruction such as pulling the handle 4102 is issued to the game board effect display device 1600, and at the same time, the LED inside the grip portion 4138 of the handle 4102 is flashed. Even if the player is engrossed in the game, the grip portion 4138 blinking below the left hand is conspicuous, and the operation timing is not missed.
When the player pulls the handle 4102, the rotary decoration 4003 rotates, and at the same time, power is generated by the generator 4040. The generated electricity is stored in a capacitor of the flash switch 4038.
Since a one-way rotation clutch 4109 (FIG. 189) is interposed between the handle 4102 and the drive wheel 4106 rotated by the handle 4102, the player can repeatedly pull the handle 4102, and each time, The rotation speed of the decorative body 4003 can be increased.

  On the other hand, the LEDs arranged on the surface of the band region 4034 are turned on, and the band region is brightly raised. The band region 4034 is rotating with the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003. Then, when the rotation speed is low and the amount of power generated by the generator 4040 is small, the blinking device 4037 judges from the voltage of the capacitor and lights the LED (FIG. 217) with "Mouth Kosi" in the band area by blinking the LED. To display. In this display, the characters and the picture are recognized at a certain position by blinking all of the LEDs that represent the letters and the picture simultaneously according to the rotation speed of the rotary decoration 4003 and the afterimage of the eyes. By matching the rotation speed of the rotating decorative body 4003 with the blinking timing of each LED representing the character, the character appears to stop even though the rotating decorative body 4003 is rotating. The actual blinking position deviates, and eventually the reading becomes difficult. Therefore, the player controls the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003 by operating the pull handle 4102 so that the character can be read.

Alternatively, a narrow band of light is formed by about five of the LED lines 4035 (FIG. 217B) of the LEDs in the band region 4034, and the band is rotated by the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003. Then, when the band of light comes to the front of the player due to rotation, only a predetermined LED of the LED line 4035 constituting the band of light is turned off, and the light of the light is turned on within a time when the afterimage remains in the eyes. A structure in which the band is rotated several times and the position of the LED that is turned off during that period is sequentially displaced so that the character or picture emerges as a whole may be adopted.
In this case as well, it is necessary for the light band to pass a predetermined number of times within the time period in which the afterimage remains in the eyes. If this timing does not match, the characters and patterns are deformed or flow and cannot be correctly recognized. By illuminating only the LED that forms the character or picture by darkening the entire rotary decoration 4003, a character or picture that shines bright only when the rotation decoration 4003 has a predetermined number of rotations can be displayed.

Further, when the player repeats the operation of pulling the handle 4102 in accordance with the display such as "Mowskosi" or the like, finally, the voltage of the capacitor reaches the threshold value of the switching element, the flash lamp 4039 is turned on, and the flash lamp 4039 is turned on. , The rotating decorative body 4003 shines brightly. In this situation, the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment such as "Yattane". A display such as “Yattane” may be displayed in the band region 4034. The display in the band area 4034 can be not only characters but also pictures and patterns. In addition, if the LED has three colors, it is possible to display a color picture, a symbol, or the like.
In addition, when the control unit 4300 of the pachinko machine 1 advances the progress of the player participation effect in a direction advantageous to the player by using the result, the player tries to turn on the flash lamp 4039 more and more. Therefore, interest in games is improved.

Such an operation of rotating the rotating decorative body 4003 by pulling, and further increasing the rotation of the rotating decorative body 4003 by repeatedly pulling, "Replenish energy" which often appears at the time of the reach of the effect screen. If you encourage yourself to take time to excite yourself while taking time, such as "burn out", the operation will be performed according to the excitement, which is effective.
In the above description, the flash lamp 4039 is turned on when the power generation exceeds the threshold value of the switching element, but the LED in the grip 4138 at hand may be turned on at the same time.
Note that when the rotary decorative body 4003 is not rotated (when the handle 4102 is not pulled), various messages and the like can be displayed in the band area 4034 by an electronic display method.

  The brake device 4145 functions when the linear member 4202 is pulled out, and can adjust the braking time and strength. For this reason, similarly, when the puller 4102 is pulled, the resistance at the time of withdrawal is different. When the effect of the pachinko machine 1 changes in a direction advantageous to the player, if the braking force is increased to increase the withdrawal resistance, the player When that fact is remembered and the user again encounters a state with a high withdrawal resistance, he or she is expected to have some good luck, although it is invisible as in the effect screen, and the interest in the game is improved.

  In addition, since the push button 4141 is provided on the right side of the grip portion 4138, if the push timing is good when the push is performed while pulling the handle 4102, the rotary decorative body 4003 is moved from the front by the motor and the gear structure. The structure can be divided into two and moved left and right along the first drive shaft 4008. When the rotating decorative body 4003 is opened to the left and right, the internal flash lamp 4039 is exposed, and the rotating decorative body 4003 can be produced more brilliantly. As described above, only when the pressing timing is good, the rotating decorative body 4003 opens and gorgeously develops, so that the player has a hope that the big hit may be close, and the interest in the game is increased. Deepens.

When the sixth rendering operation unit 400E pulls the handle 4102 to reach the predetermined number of rotations of the rotary decorative body 4003, the flash lamp 4039 is turned on and the like, and the satisfaction (such as the player participation production) such as “Yattane” is obtained. Is a result of having participated in the game), but there is an individual difference among the players, and although the pulling the puller 4102 is weak, it is not possible to reach the certain number of rotations. Although the player participation effect period has elapsed, the rotation speed temporarily increases only by performing a single pull operation in a short time, but the rotation is attenuated in a short time, and before reaching the constant rotation speed The above-mentioned result may not be obtained because the period of the player participation effect has elapsed.
A seventh effect operation unit 400F according to the next seventh embodiment solves this point.

[3-4m. Seventh embodiment of effect operation unit)
In the seventh effect operation unit 400F, a first electromagnetic clutch 4041 and an assist motor 4042 are added to the rotating unit 4000 of the sixth effect operation unit 400E, and a second electromagnetic clutch 4146 is added to the drive unit 4100. The generator 4040 in the sixth effect operation unit 400E functions as a rotation speed sensor 4040, and the blinking device 4037 has a simple calculation function (described later).

The first electromagnetic clutch 4041 is provided between the first drive shaft 4008 to which the rotary decoration 4003 is attached and the assist motor 4042 (FIG. 218), and the power of the assist motor 4042 is intermittently connected to the first drive shaft 4008. I can do it.
The second electromagnetic clutch 4146 is provided between the third drive shaft 4103 (FIG. 188) of the drive unit 4100 and the first drive shaft 4008 of the rotating unit 4000.

  The first electromagnetic clutch 4041 and the second electromagnetic clutch 4146 can be set to “opposite operation”. In other words, in other than the player participation effect, the first electromagnetic clutch 4041 is “disconnected” for interrupting the transmission of power and the second electromagnetic clutch 4042 is “connected” for transmitting the power. Sometimes, when the “reverse action” is set, the first electromagnetic clutch 4041 is in the “connected” state and the second electromagnetic clutch 4042 is in the “disengaged” state.

The assist motor 4042 is a DC motor, and is connected to the first drive shaft 4008 of the rotary decoration 4003 via the first electromagnetic clutch 4041. A rotation speed sensor 4040 is arranged on the first drive shaft 4008.
The first electromagnetic clutch 4041, the second electromagnetic clutch 4146, the assist motor 4042, and the rotation speed sensor 4040 are connected to the blinking device 4037 having the simple calculation function in this embodiment.
Other configurations are the same as the sixth production operation unit. Reference numeral 4102 denotes a handle, 4137 denotes a cylinder shaft portion, 4200 denotes a cover portion, 4107 denotes a mainspring, 4106 denotes a drive wheel, 4145 denotes a brake device, and 4039 denotes a flash lamp. is there. For the specific configuration regarding these, the description of the third effect operation unit 400B to the sixth effect operation unit 400E is cited.

In the pachinko machine 1 provided with the seventh effect operation unit 400F, the game ball hit on the game board 5 enters the winning opening, and the symbol fluctuates (start t0, end t4) (FIG. 219). When the start time t1 and the end time t4) are reached, the program is set as a period of the player participation effect.
Then, when the player participation effect is started, the first and second electromagnetic clutches 4041 and 4146 are set in a state in which the opposing operation can be set. In addition, the blinking device 4037 is placed in an operable state. Further, an operation prompting instruction (start t2, end t3) for recommending pulling the puller 4102 such as "pull the puller" is slightly delayed from the start (t1) of the player participation performance, and the game board effect display device (liquid crystal device). 1600.

When the player pulls the handle 4102, the drive wheel 4106 is rotated in the same manner as in the case of the third effect operation unit 400B, and is rotated via the third drive shaft 4103, the second drive shaft 4012, and the first drive shaft 4008. The body 4003 rotates (the rotation speed is R). After that, even if the pulling is stopped, the rotation is continued by the function of the one-way rotation clutch 4109 (FIG. 188). However, the rotational speed R decreases due to friction or the like.
In this case, the first electromagnetic clutch 4041 between the first drive shaft 4008 and the assist motor 4042 is "disengaged", and the rotation of the first drive shaft 4008 is not transmitted to the assist motor 4042.
As shown in FIG. 220, the rotational speed R of the rotary decorative body 4003 usually increases from 0 to reach the point b (t31). ) And descend again.

The assist motor 4042 is a DC motor, and forms a rotation assist device together with the first and second electromagnetic clutches and 4041 and 4146. The rotation assisting device assists the assist motor 4042 so that the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration body 4003 reaches the set rotation speed R1 necessary to obtain the result (described above) of participating in the player participation effect. It is.
Note that the rotation speed R of the assist motor 4042 is set to the maximum rotation speed R1 (detection voltage Vr) at the maximum.
In order to start the assist motor 4042, a predetermined condition regarding the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 is required. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is a necessary condition that the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003 at the detection position (t3) has reached the threshold rotation speed R2 (also referred to as the minimum rotation speed).

The threshold rotation speed R2 is for determining whether or not the player is willing to participate in the player participation effect, and does not pull or pull the handle at all in spite of the instruction for promoting the operation. In a case where it is not easy, the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 should not reach the minimum rotation speed R2 at the detection position (t3). In such a case, the achievement of the player participation effect is abandoned. No rotation assistance is provided.
However, the reach effect itself proceeds irrespective of the player participation effect, and the combination of symbols is determined (t4).
The detection position (t3) may be set as appropriate, but in this embodiment, as the period (t2-t3) of the operation promotion instruction, the player who has the intention to pull holds the pull handle 4102 and is required to pull this. A sufficient time is set to give an extra time to the average time, and the end of the operation promotion instruction (t3) is set as the detection position.

FIG. 221 shows time (t) on the horizontal axis and rotation on the vertical axis, showing the relationship between the set rotation speed R1 and the minimum rotation speed R2 and how the rotation speed R of the rotary decorative body 4003 is increased or decreased by a normal operation. It is a summary of taking the number R.
The time (t) is a time from the start (t1) of the player participation effect program, and the rotation speed R on the vertical axis corresponds to the voltage V detected by the rotation sensor 4040.
FIG. 222 is a diagram summarizing various aspects of the operation of the player pulling the handle 4102 in response to the operation promotion instruction.

A line (broken line) indicates a case where the handle 4102 is not drawn at all. Since the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 is zero, the detection voltage Va of the rotation sensor 4040 is zero. The rotation speed R is naturally lower than the threshold rotation speed R2 (detection voltage Von). Therefore, the rotation assist is not performed, and the rotation speed R of the rotary decorative body 4003 does not reach the set rotation speed R1, so that the result of the player participation effect cannot be obtained.
The line B is a case in which the player does not actively participate in the player participation effect because the player only draws but draws sloppyly. At the detection position (t3), the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 is lower than the threshold rotation speed R2 (detection voltage Vb <Von). Therefore, also in this case, the rotation assist is not performed, and the rotation speed R of the rotary decorative body 4003 does not reach the set rotation speed R1, so that the result of the player participation effect cannot be obtained.

  The C-line repeatedly draws the puller 4102 in order to actively participate in the player participation effect, but because it is weak, there is a possibility that the set rotation speed R1 cannot be reached during the player participation effect period (t1-t4). It is. Although the rotation speed R obtained by the first pulling decreases to the detection position (t3), since the rotation speed R at the detection position (t3)> the threshold rotation speed R2 (the detection voltage Vc> Von), the rotation assist device is not used. Operate (reverse operation set of first and second electromagnetic clutches 4041 and 4146, ON of assist motor 4042).

As shown in FIG. 223, the rotation assist by the assist motor 4042 is performed by rotating the rotation decoration body 4003 during the period (t3-t4) from the detection position (t3) to the end position (t4) of the player participation effect. The rotation speed increase line has a slope (ΔV / t) from 0 to the set rotation speed R1 (detection voltage Vr). This is because if the rotational speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 exceeds the threshold rotational speed R2 at the detection position (t3) (R ≧ R2), the rotational speed R (for example, the detection voltage Vc) to the rotational speed R up to that point This is for assisting the rotation in a shape as closely as possible (in such a manner that the change in the rotation speed is not conspicuous), and for surely reaching the set rotation speed R1 (FIG. 222, t36).
Therefore, even in the case of the C-line, even though it is weak, the rotational speed R of the rotary decorative body 4003 reaches the set rotational speed R2 due to the rotation assistance (t32), and a performance result by participating in the player participation performance is obtained. be able to.

The line D is a case where a large number of players normally draw the handle 4102 and is assumed to be drawn only once with a constant force and duration. Since the rotational speed R of the rotational decoration 4003 is higher than the threshold rotational speed R2 at the detection position (t3), the rotational assist is thereafter provided in the same manner as described above, and reaches the set rotational speed R1 within the player participation effect period. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a performance result of participating in the player participation performance.
In the case of the line D, if the similar pulling is performed again, the rotation speed R is likely to reach the set rotation speed R1 without performing the rotation assist, but it is uncertain whether the pulling operation is performed again. After the detection position (t3), rotation assist is performed so that the player can always obtain a performance result of having participated in the player participation performance.

As an example of such a performance result, a character or a pattern such as “intense Atsu” appears in the band area of the rotating decorative body 4003, and a flash lamp flashes, and the mood and expectation of the player are enhanced. There is.
In other words, if a person (normal person) including a woman or an elderly person can enjoy a game, the puller 4102 can be pulled normally to make the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 exceed the threshold rotation speed R2 at the detection position (t3). The level, that is, a setting that satisfies a predetermined condition regarding rotation is established.
The level of the threshold rotation speed R2 (detection voltage Von) can be adjusted.

The line E is a case where the handle 4102 is drawn strongly and long, and the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 exceeds the set rotation speed R1 before reaching the detection position (t3) (detection voltage Ve). Is the case. For this reason, rotation assist is not necessary, but at the detection position (t3), since the rotation speed R is greater than or equal to the threshold rotation speed R2, the rotation assist device operates.
However, since the maximum rotation assistance is the set rotation speed R1 (voltage Vr), the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 is reduced to the set rotation speed R1 (detection voltage Vr) at the beginning of the operation of the rotation assistance device, and thereafter, the set rotation speed is set. The number R1 is maintained. Therefore, the player on the E-line can obtain a performance result by participating in the player participation performance.

  In any case, when the detection position (t3) has elapsed and the rotation assist is executed, the above-described reciprocal operation of the electromagnetic clutch is set and the second electromagnetic clutch 4146 is "disengaged". The operation of pulling the handle 4102 after the detection position (t3) is free, but the rotational force is not transmitted to the rotary decoration 4003, and the operation of pulling the handle 4102 has no relation to the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003. In the figure, the change in the assumed rotational speed after the detection position (t3) is indicated by a chain line.

The set number of revolutions R1 is the number of revolutions when a character or pattern stops and appears on the surface of the rotating decorative body 4003, and such a character or pattern is arranged on the surface of the rotating decorative body 4003 as described above. It appears when the blinking interval of the small LED constituting the LED line 4035 and the rotation speed of the rotary decoration 4003 are synchronized.
As described above, the display of characters and patterns to enhance the interest of the player in the game is one of the performance results obtained when the player participates in the player participation effect.

In the control unit 4300 (FIG. 199), “player participation effect” means that data of the rotation speed sensor 4040 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4302 through various boards 4308 such as a door frame, and processed by the peripheral control MPU. By outputting to various substrates 4308 of the frame or outputting to the lamp driving substrate 4309, the next processing (FIG. 224) is executed.
This processing is executed at regular intervals in the player participation type effect processing performed by the control unit 4300.
In step S1, the time of a timer provided in control unit 4300 is read and stored. Also, T = 0 for timing is set.
As described above, the player participation effect is based on the premise that the handle 4102 is pulled by the display of the operation promotion instruction and the rotary decorative body 4003 is rotated, so that the rotary decorative body 4003 is rotated in the next step S2. Judge whether it is done. If it is rotating (the number of rotations R> 0), the process proceeds to the next step S3. If it is not rotating, it is determined whether or not the player has an intention to pull (the intention to participate in the player participation effect). Since it is not clear at the stage, do nothing and repeat the return.

In step S3, it is determined whether or not the time T has reached the detection position (t3). If not, the return is repeated to wait for the detection position (t3).
When reaching the detection position (t3), the current rotational speed R is read from the rotational sensor 4040, and it is determined in step S4 whether the rotational speed R has reached the threshold rotational speed R2. If it has not reached, it is determined that the player does not intend to participate in the player participation production and obtain a performance result by that (do not pull the puller 4102 or do not pull it), and the process proceeds to step S14. It is set to cancel the participant participation effect itself and returns. From the next cycle, the processing of the player participation effect is interrupted.

Conversely, when the rotation speed R has reached the threshold rotation speed R2, it is determined that the user participates in the player participation effect and expects a result in the effect, and determines that the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003 is to be assisted. And prepare for it.
That is, in step S5, the first and second electromagnetic clutches 4041 and 4146 are set to oppose to each other, and the rotational power of the assist motor 4042 is connected to the rotation of the rotary decoration 4003, while the rotational power from the drive wheel 4106 is rotated. It is separated from the rotation of the decorative body 4003.
Next, in step S6, the assist motor 4042 is turned on to assist the rotation of the rotary decorative body 4003.
The assistance is to gradually increase the applied voltage Vm to the assist motor 4042 from the voltage Vs (FIG. 221) corresponding to the rotation speed R at that time by ΔV / t as described above.

Then, in step S7, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed R has reached the set rotation speed R1. If not, repeat return and wait for arrival. If it has reached, in step S8, the voltage Vr corresponding to the set rotation speed R1 is set in the assist motor 4042 and maintained.
Then, in step S9, the result of the effect by participating in the player participation effect is displayed using the LED line 4035 and the flash lamp 4039 in this embodiment.
The performance of the result is maintained until the end of the player participation performance (reach performance).

In step S10, it is determined whether or not time T = t4 has been reached. If not, the return is repeated to wait for arrival. When the time has reached, the assist motor 4042 is turned off to stop the drive, and the electromagnetic clutch is actuated almost simultaneously. Clear That is, the first electromagnetic clutch 4041 is set to “disconnected”, and the second electromagnetic clutch 4146 is set to “connected”.
Then, in step S13, the display of the result of the effect is ended, and the process of "player participation effect" is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, as summarized in FIG. 225, first, the period of the operation promotion instruction (t2-t3) is set in the reach effect period (t1-t4). During this period, the handle 4102 is pulled and the rotary decoration 4003 rotates, and at the detection position (t3) at the end of the operation promotion instruction period, the rotation R of the rotary decoration 4003 reaches the threshold rotation R2. Rotation assistance is performed during a period (t3-t4). At that time, the opposing operation is set to the first and second electromagnetic clutches 4041 and 4146, and the first “disconnection” and the second “connection” up to that point are reversed to the first “connection” and the second “disconnection”. Set. Then, the assist motor 4042 is started, the initial rotation speed R (the detection voltage Vm) is gradually increased by ΔV / t, and when the rotation speed reaches the set rotation speed R1, the rotation speed R1 (the detection voltage Vr) is maintained.
When the rotational speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 is equal to the set rotational speed R1, a result of the effect by participating in the player participation effect is produced.

That is, the blinking device 4037 causes characters and pictures to be displayed in the band area 4034 (FIG. 217) provided on the rotary decorative body 4003, and also causes the flash lamp 4039 to blink.
The characters and patterns displayed in the band area 4034 are the ones stored in the ROM of the blinking device 4037 and are displayed by blinking the LED by using an arithmetic unit. If the time from reaching the set number of revolutions R1 (t32) to determining the reach symbol (t4) is relatively long, it is also possible to change the characters and pictures to be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment (seventh effect operation unit 400F), when the rotation speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 reaches the set rotation speed R1, the band area 4034 of the rotary decoration 4003 displays the emotion of the player, such as "Atsu". The characters and pictures that excite the game are displayed in a static manner, and the flash lamp 4039 and the like are blinked to produce a brilliant effect. Although provided, the effect when the rotational speed R of the rotary decoration 4003 reaches the set rotational speed R1 is not limited to such an effect.
For example, a dome-shaped opaque cover is attached to the rotary decorative body 4003 as a half to cover the surface, and when the rotation speed R reaches the set rotation speed R1, the dome is divided into right and left and the internal flash lamp 4039 is activated. An effect such as shining, or a movable figure arranged inside the rotating decorative body 4003 protruding out can be the result.
Further, the timing at which the game effect of the pachinko machine 1 becomes the player participation effect is not limited to the above-described reach state, and the player effect may be set at a point of the game effect.

  Further, since the operation of pulling the handle 4102 after the detection position (t3) does not affect the rotation of the rotary decorative body 4003 by setting the second electromagnetic clutch 4146 to "disconnect", the pulling operation after the detection position (t3) is not performed. Although it becomes irrelevant to the player participation effect, a separate generator or a rotation speed sensor and a flywheel are arranged on the third drive shaft 4103 of the drive unit 4100, and the third drive shaft when the puller 4102 is repeatedly pulled. The brightness of the rotary decorative body 4003 itself and the brightness of peripheral decorations may be changed according to the number of rotations of the handle 4103 so that a result of pulling the handle 4102 may appear. It is also possible to control the sound in accordance with the movement when the handle 4102 is operated. These can also be one of the performance results obtained by the player as a result of participating in the player participation performance.

  When the second electromagnetic clutch 4146 is designed to be "connected" when the player participation effect starts (reach state) and is "disconnected" in other cases, and is not in the reach state It is also possible to adopt a configuration to prevent the handle 4102 from being pulled due to mischief or lack of hand and the rotating decorative body 4003 from rotating without meaning.

Furthermore, since the seventh effect operation unit 400F is provided with the brake device 4145, a plurality of symbol change suspensions due to winning are displayed using the function of the peripheral control board 4302 (FIG. 199), one of which is a hit. When the symbol change is executed when it is determined to be determined (hit holding), the brake device 4145 may be lightly actuated to slightly increase the pulling resistance when the puller 4102 is pulled.
Then, the symbol change of the hit holding becomes the reach state, and when the player pulls the puller 4102 in accordance with the operation promotion instruction (t11), the sense of pulling is different from the case of the other reach states, and the player feels like "Oyatsu". You can also predict the hit. This prediction method does not apply to all the hit holdings, but occasionally balances with the display “heavy hot” during the normal pulling operation. In other words, it is necessary to prevent all of the cases where the result is “extensive hot” from coming off. This can also be one of the performance results obtained by the player as a result of participating in the player participation performance.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 including the seventh effect operation unit 400F, when the puller 4102 is pulled in accordance with the operation promotion instruction at the time of the player participation effect, the effect that enhances the mood and expectations of the player as described above. As a result of this effect, it is possible to effectively prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the left of the through hole 111 in a front view, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a light-transmitting member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and an upper left unit mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member to the lower front of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. It includes a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are connected to the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531 and a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. A lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532 a and the square lens portion 532 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a front surface and a rear surface formed into a smooth convex lens shape. By the circular lens portion 532a, light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward in a dot shape. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c at the front surface. The input lens portion 532e bulging rearward in the shape of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e generally increases outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is concavely arcuate backward, and the crest portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove and the ridge move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflector 532f is formed such that grooves and ridges are alternately located in the circumferential direction with respect to radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the square lens unit 532b, light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a forward is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. ), And travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface in the square lens portion 532b. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected inside the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside substantially in parallel with the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected by the front reflection portion 532f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction decreases as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). Accordingly, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens 532d and is emitted forward from the square lens 532b. At this time, since the cross section of the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed in a wavy shape, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b The light can be emitted substantially uniformly from the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member).

  The square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b to the front has a density of concentric stripes. Light can be prevented from being emitted, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thus, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located at a position in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and is located at the front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons formed in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, the left decorative lens member has a multi-faceted decorative portion that is forwardly moved from the square lens portion 532b of the left diffuser lens member 532 by light emitted from the circular lens portion 532a of the left diffuser lens member 532 forward. Each of them is illuminated and decorated by the light applied to the light.

  The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed in a square shape extending in the front-rear direction, with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface on the outer periphery projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 534 on the left unit is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side moves from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear as it moves upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is depressed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534; A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind.
FIG. 85 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and to the right of the through hole 111 in a front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. And a door frame right side decorative board 552 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side from the front view center and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. Transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, right unit left diffusion member 554 attached to the left side of right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and right unit left decoration member Transparent flat right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with the front and right sides open. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light blocking member 559, and a right unit left light blocking member 556 on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are mounted so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to a front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 are not shown. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension and a short rectangular tube extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center on the front side in the left-right direction, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center on the front side in the left-right direction, and a center mounted on the front side in the left-right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c.
The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for light emitting decoration of the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has both front and rear surfaces formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a flat main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short flat shape. A notch 553c formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the 554, an input lens portion 553e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a, and a plurality of input lenses 553e are provided in the vertical direction. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction such that the input lens portion 553e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it moves forward from the rear end side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward, and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 553e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the plane of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side-surface reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed toward the center when cut in a radial direction with the input lens portion 553e as a center. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 forwards into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, so that each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. Will be diffused radially forward with the center as the center.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left side of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left side of the main body 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflection section 553f on the inner side of the left side. Becomes

  Then, the light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left as viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f to the left of the right unit left light blocking member 559 are left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body portion 553a is radiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the left side of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. Thus, light having a more uniform density can be emitted to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing concave portion 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in a front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the effect of the production is transparent. Is applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. Part 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape from the left end side of the rear wall part 556b to the right in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right side in a front view right side of the main body part 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a plurality of vertically arranged input lens portions 556e, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main unit 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and has a left end extending substantially to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thus, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 556e, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is a main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in a radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as a center. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens unit 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, so that each input lens unit 556e in the main body 556a. Will be diffused radially forward with the center as the center.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left side of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right side of the main body 556a, and is reflected by the inner side of the right side to the side reflection section 556f. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. In addition, although light is also radiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a has a white color. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body section 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side face reflection section 556f in the main body section 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 which is radiated leftward from the side face reflection section 556f. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction at the dividing line to form a concentric arc groove. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. Thus, uniform light with more and less light and shade can be irradiated to the right. Thus, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 556f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape. Is applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.
The right decorative member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the right decorative member 554 and the left cover 555 of the right unit. The decorations applied to the right decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view.
The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened.
The right unit left light blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding shortly to the right from the rear side of the main body 559a in a front view, and a rear wall 559b. A plurality of notches 559c, which are cut out in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the wall portion 559b to the left in front view and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, extend rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a, and A plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light blocking member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed so as to be inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main units 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d which are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are respectively formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes a right opening that is opened to the right of a right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state where it is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left and right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with a predetermined width in the left and right direction. . Through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration board 552 to the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right light shielding member 559 and the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit are formed of an opaque member, and are radiated forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, since the inner space of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d, they are disposed behind the respective divided spaces. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and a portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be removed. , Can be independently illuminated. In other words, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to independently decorate each of them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b includes a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions provided in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons formed in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the three parts from the top of the front part, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one by one on the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape conforming to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, when a problem such as clogging of a ball or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in the door frame right side unit 550, a right unit left decorative member 554, a right unit right decorative member 557, and a right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the members 561 and the like to emit light in a unique manner, the staff in the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the problem and made to recognize it, so that a quick response to the problem becomes possible. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being irritated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87C is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 90 is a sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and the center in the left and right direction projects forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having a rear open end, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits that extend and penetrate in the front-back direction, respectively, and are vertically separated A unit body 574 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 574 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is attached to the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are mounted on the front surface of the unit body 574 respectively and are closed, and both right and left ends of the top middle decoration member 576. A plurality of (three left and right) light guide members 578 in the form of a transparent flat plate extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 574 over the opening 574a, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side, and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top center left decorative member 581 and a top center right decorative member 582 extending to the vicinity of the center side end portion of each of them.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are mounted on portions of the plurality (three) of the light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit body 574 on the rear side in the left and right direction. A pair of board bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door which is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled diagonally to the door frame top unit 570, and their front surfaces are obliquely mounted such that the side near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a quadrangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed such that the shape of the unit body 574 as viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a rectangle extending left and right with a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower side. The unit body 574 has a rectangular shape extending in the left and right directions and a half of the full width (length in the left and right direction) about the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the square as the base. The shape is formed by combining a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 with the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 on both sides of the front protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating back and forth are formed in portions of the front surface from the left and right ends to positions outside the portions protruding forward, respectively. The unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely to a portion of the front surface that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape, extending left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front and rear direction. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, each being vertically separated by three.

  Further, the unit body 574 includes an upper opening 574c which is notched squarely from the rear end toward the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end to the left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent so that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper end of the left and right sides of the pentagon. And a substantially right triangle connecting the lower end of the left and right sides of the side pentagon with the tip of the set side. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal part on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is inclined behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a manner that the front surface is inclined downward and moves rearward along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape on both left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The light guide member 578 will be described as a straight portion that extends straight from side to side from the end side toward the center side. 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the center end portion of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction at the circular arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and is formed such that the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like unevenness, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b and having a plurality of unevennesses. It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight section 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is formed by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the whole of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top frame decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579, between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574 e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583 a is mounted facing right. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 574 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 allows the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 to pass through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front in a right and left direction extending rightward from a rear side of the side wall, and a front end of an upper side of the side wall. An upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and an outline that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 574. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so as to move forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 574. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to cause a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in a board base 585 attached to the right rear side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the front as it moves toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in line with the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571.
The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 gouge backward. Therefore, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that only the top middle decoration member 576 protrudes forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front upper portion of the door frame 3.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a which are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and a high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 before and after the door frame base 110 is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , The game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower part than the upper plate 321) (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326c) on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is recessed so as to go backwards (the plate unit). The right and left front ends of the rendering operation unit 400 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 are formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is highlighted to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation buttons 410 can be seen almost in front, so that the large and round operation buttons 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation buttons 410 can be increased. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 includes the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “rapidly pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward and is round, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed not only from above as in the case of the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, but also from the left or right. , Or from the front, the operation can be satisfactorily performed, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised by the player. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 under the lower pachinko machine becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, and appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the lower part of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear portion of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In comparison, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for removing the game balls of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326 (to the right outside the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side, the lower counter ball supply port 323c and the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower dish hole 322a disposed below (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish 322, the lower dish hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls on the upper plate 321 or the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 with the upper plate 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoying that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a or indirectly reflected to the wall on the right side to the hole 322a. Thus, in a state in which the lower bowl extracting hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower bowl 322 from the lower bowl supplying port 323c is located on the left side of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a in the lower bowl 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 outputted forward from the lower speaker opening 326e can be tactilely felt by the player. It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is formed in a plate shape from the right side of the through hole 111 and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Further, since the door frame 3 can decorate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, a gaming hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the door frame top unit 570 at the top middle decorative member is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the left and right front surfaces are located rearward. Thereby, only the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player. The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers separated from each other is provided on the upper part of a door frame in a conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of perforated metal at both left and right ends in a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extend from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575, and The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not conspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, so that the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is present, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can provide the player with high-quality stereo sound. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side from the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes greatly forward in the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, so that the top middle decoration member 576 is formed. And when the effect operation unit 400 is illuminated and decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. As shown, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably mounted on a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall above and below the front end on the front left side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body base 600 that is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  The body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 600 and is used to launch a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the cage player side, a board unit 900 attached to a lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game A game board placement portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right end of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement portion 602. And a game board regulating unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view for mounting the ball firing device 680, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates back and forth and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear lower left side from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, and the door of the board unit 900 A connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward, and a circular opening that penetrates back and forth at the lower left side of the game board placement section 602 when viewed from the front to allow the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a front view, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends at the left end of the rear surface when viewed from the front, and is an upper hinge mounting for mounting the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so that the connection opening 606 can be opened and closed, and a position slightly below and to the left of the center in front of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame-side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 having a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped rear portion bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in front view of the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, and is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. A lower hinge hole (not shown) for the outer frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. Hinge second main body 643 in which the rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L-shape, and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame, and extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643, and the door frame 3 A restricting piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally-extended portion with a predetermined interval above the horizontally-extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion of the main body 641 bent upward. In the main frame side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93, and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is mounted on a flat launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 681 on the right side in front view. A launch solenoid 682 made of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a hitting hammer 683 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and extending obliquely upward and left from near the tip of the hitting hammer 683. And a launch rail 684 on which a game ball can be rolled.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 684, and game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  If the hit ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, the distance between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 and can lock between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of being locked to the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a cylindrical shape, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the hook 702 for the frame or the hook 703 for the outer frame.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the reverse L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 in the left direction when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that is swingably suspended from above.

  The payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 accommodated in a payout control board box 950. And Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and plays the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game balls forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850 e forward to the front frame of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full-frame taxiway 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the fullness taxiway 862 are connected to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 extending up and down and having a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and having a front side opened, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 attached thereto, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear piece which are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball-out detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece members 825 and 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a which is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c extends from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end thereof at an obliquely lower angle with respect to the horizontal at a small angle, and at the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducer 821d. The detection unit 821e includes a detection unit 821e that extends straight down to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 has a cutout portion 821g on the right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding entrance 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guidance exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and the center of the height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introducing portion 822d. The detection unit 822e includes a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in the width of the left and right sides of the rear case 822 in a meandering manner. In addition, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g on the right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the rear case 822 is assembled to the ball guiding unit 820, the rear case 822 is formed so that the guiding passage 821c and the guiding passage 822c coincide with each other. I have.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position close to the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is brought into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide path 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state in which the detection piece 825f is not detected with respect to the ball out detection sensor 827.
That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in the direction that projects into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in a direction (to the right in front view) so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a approaches the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f behind the movable piece member 826 is in a state where it is not detected with respect to the ball out detection sensor 827.
That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Also, when the game balls flow through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front 825 of the movable piece member and at the rear 826 of the movable piece member, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable member front 825 and the movable member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f at the front of the movable piece member 825 and at the rear of the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibration causes the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by using separate movable piece members 825 and 826, respectively. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by one ball cutout detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide paths 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece 825 or the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball out detection sensor 827. You. Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable member 825 and the rear movable member 826, the weight of the front movable member 825, the movable member rear 826, and the weight of the weight. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in a direction in which the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. By doing so, it is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 whose lower ends protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow by their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the weight of the movable piece can be determined by the weight of the weight of the weight of the weight before the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member 826. The lower ends of 825a and 826a can be easily turned (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as a weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e formed as through holes and mounted, even if the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 frequently rotate, the weight is not changed. The front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable member can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the front 825 of the movable member and the rear 826 of the movable member (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e). . Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thereby simplifying the trouble of attaching the weight. Thus, the cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c have introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a, respectively, on the upstream side of the portions where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, it is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have been caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front part 825 and the rear part 826 of the movable part can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be favorably rotated, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Further, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide paths 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide paths 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass, and a game ball that opens near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass through, the ball removing outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that game balls are distributed. It includes a possible payout passage 832d, and a rear box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. Motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834, meshing with the drive gear 835, and rotatable by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrating therethrough and having a front end attached to the front cover 833 and a rear A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 penetrating the shaft member 838, which is rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the discharging blade 839. And

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 for separating the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball emptying passage. 831e and 832e are diverged from each other and are rotatably mounted by a front box 831 and a rear box 832, and can be used to close the ball passages 831e and 832e. A ball release lever 844 slidably mounted vertically slidably on the upper right side of the box 832 to make the ball release movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the overall height to extend substantially horizontally to the left, and then vertically downwards again about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely to the lower right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d, and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball ejection outlet 832c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. After being bent so as to extend vertically to the left and approximately horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed in a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which the portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended, and the height of the rear box 832 is approximately 1/3 of the total height. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball pullout lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d, 832d and the ball empty passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached. In other words, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are separated from the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on a peripheral surface at a rear end thereof and connectable to the dispensing blade 839 are provided. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylinder 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality (three) of front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be alternated. 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion that projects cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a and that has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  The three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, a diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to a portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

Therefore, it is possible to hold approximately 3/10 (between 1/4 to 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can.
In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively.
In addition, the discharge blade 839 is disposed at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the discharge passages 831d and 832d, and is bent in a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Accordingly, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 abuts on the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. , And is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d, 832d, and can pass through the payout outlets 831b, 832b. Released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to be about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be reduced.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a bent, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through-hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower part of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a position extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the payout entrances 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The payout device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state. In contact. This restricts rotation of the ball-moving movable piece 843 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a rectangular shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball emptying passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing movable pieces 843 (the main body portion 843a) close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Although a force for rotating the anti-clockwise rotation in a front view is exerted by this, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated by the ball release lever 844, so that the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a contacts the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e to be discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 844 upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-moving movable piece 843 projects into the ball-drawing passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-moving movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through hole and attached, even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843d. The ball-moving movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing passage 841e and 832e rust. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843, the movable ball removing piece 843 causes the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes the ball to move. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball-pull lever 844 is operated to open the ball-pull passages 831e and 832e, the ball-pull movable piece 843 can rotate favorably, so that the game ball can be reliably pulled out. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Top full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 whose rear side is open, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and its front side is open. The dispenser includes a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center on the upper surface in front view Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. And a ball ejection outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball emptying outlet 850h that are arranged in order from the left side in a front view and open downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  When the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball removing inlet 850b is provided. Are located immediately below the ball ejection outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. In addition, when the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball emptying outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball-free guide path 865 are respectively opened directly above the rear end openings (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, game balls that have entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a are opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and further, when the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition piece 850f and become full. The water is discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850 e, and is sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically transfers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 in accordance with the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the upper full tank path unit 850. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and guides the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850 e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guiding the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls discharged from the upper ball emptying outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball guide path 865 that discharges air to the bottom.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 are arranged in order from the left to the right in front view. The normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball empty taxiway 865 have their rear ends open upward. The normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts, as shown in the figure.

The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotated clockwise in front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower by the height of the sphere.
The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. And an operating projection 863e that projects forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and can abut on the door opening / closing abutting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 means that the openings do not need to be sealed, and it is sufficient that the game balls cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as approaching the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864 so that the second door plate portion 863c is located at the front end of the lower case 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has a front end formed with a through-ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e, and the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway are not opened. The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the door frame 3 is activated. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the projection 863e, a force acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And, the front end opening of the full tank guiding path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown in the drawing, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In a state where the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank In front of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  As described above, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made to be different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening and closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321, and more payout devices 830 from the payout device 830. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 while the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it remains above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, Payout of game balls to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 by storing the game balls in the storage passage 277, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with the game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  The stopping of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed by, for example, storing the game balls until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In this state, the number that can fill the storage path 277 on the upstream side, the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850 is set. When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine, and in a game state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are dispensed by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on big hit games and entertain them.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front, and in which a power supply board is accommodated; An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a dispensing control board box 950. .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510, and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 accommodated in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board with the panel plate of the game panel in an opaque state. 115 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 117 is a view of the game board from behind. It is a perspective view. FIG. 118 is a sectional view taken along line RR in FIG. 114, and FIG. 119 is a sectional view taken along line SS in FIG. Further, FIG. 120 is a front view in which the front unit of the game board is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 121 is a front view of a game board in which a panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is formed. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than an inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special lottered by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided, in which a game ball can be received in accordance with either a lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002, and a left front view of the starting port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning openings 2001, and a side slope which is attached above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view. 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a first big winning opening, which are mounted on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front. 2005, an attacker unit 2400 having a second winning opening 2006, a starter unit 2100 and a side unit. In above the bets 2200, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer in the game area 5a, a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back panel 3032, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 in the back view, and a production drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010. And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view 3031.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 on the left side and the bottom side in front view, and a back attached around the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached respectively to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 It has a rear-side movable effect unit 3500 attached thereto, and a lower-back movable effect unit 3700 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1008. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  Although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning projections projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections into inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as a glass or a metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate back and forth, and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the panel plate 1110 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends vertically. An elongated hole that extends. These fitting holes and long holes are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a stepped engagement step with a concave front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging steps are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes and the long holes. For engagement with the panel holder 1120.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting a positioning protrusion (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the front side and is recessed from the front side to the rear side (not shown), and has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step. And a through hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. Become the same plane. Further, the holding step portion has a front inner peripheral surface formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of panel panel 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the long hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step, and is disposed forward from the front of the holding step. A plurality of protruding pins that extend toward the fitting hole and can be inserted into fitting holes and long holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of panel panel 1110, panel holder 1120 and panel plate 1110 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes an engagement claw and an engagement piece that engage with the engagement step at a position corresponding to the engagement step of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw is arranged above the holding step of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step of the panel plate 1110, and projects forward from the front surface of the holding step. It is adapted to elastically engage with the engaging step. The size of the engaging claw does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step of the panel plate 1110. This engaging piece is formed along the front surface of the panel holder upward (center side) along a front surface of the panel holder, with a gap formed between the engaging piece and the front surface of the holding step portion so as to allow the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted. It extends for a predetermined amount. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws and engagement pieces.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The lower side of the rear surface of the out opening 1126 of the panel holder 1120 has the same width as the out opening 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 which is notched upward from a lower end at a lower left corner in a front view. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 to form the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of front and rear mounting holes at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) of the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss of the front component 1000 into these mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 ( The gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

  When the game panel 1100 is mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.
The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below, when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 118) for controlling the contents of the game and payout of the game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second big winning opening sensor 2402, the first receiving entrance sensor 2434, the second receiving entrance sensor 2435, the second starting via the panel relay substrate 3032. Mouth sensor (not shown), first winning opening sensor (not shown), starting port solenoid (not shown), first attacker solenoid (not shown), second attacker solenoid (not shown), vibration A minute solenoid (not shown), a general winning opening sensor 3111, a first starting port sensor 3112, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 181). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and a first lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying one special lottery result and a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the first starting port 2002. A device 1404 comprising eight LEDs for displaying a result of a second special lottery selected by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004. A special symbol display 1405, a second special reserve number display 1406 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2004, a first special lottery result or a second special lottery When the result is a "big hit" or the like, a round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 is mainly provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 118) that controls an effect to be presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 3031, and the like.

[5-7. Game board effect display device]
Next, the game board effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The game board effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side face in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side face in front view. The game board-side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves which are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rearward of the back box 3010 into the 3010c, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end projects forward from the front of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize holes 2001 which can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 are in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower portion in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is arranged below the center in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 is located on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and at a height between the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002. The second winning opening 2006 is arranged between the second starting opening 2004 and the first winning opening 2005.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a sub-out port 2007 for discharging a game ball from the inside of the game area 5a between the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. Side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, a side slope 2300 which is mounted above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view, and a start-up opening unit An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of the front view of the 2100 and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second winning opening 2006. And a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached at a substantially center in the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side slope and attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. is there. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, at the top, the first starting port 2002 is always open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

  The starting port unit 2100 is formed with a first starting port 2002 and has a light-transmitting unit main body 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 2101. And a startup port decoration board 2102 (see FIG. 120) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The starting port unit 2100 can make the lower side of the first starting port 2002 emit light by lighting the LED of the starting port decoration board 2102.

  The start-up opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the first start-up opening 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start-up opening 2002 will be described later. It is located immediately below the chance exit 2536 on the stage 2530 of the center role 2500. Therefore, when a game ball is released downward from the chance exit 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted at the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the central delivery port 3135 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 that are always open upward.

  The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 arranged side by side on the left and right, and is provided so that the three general winning openings 2001 become higher toward the left as viewed from the front.

  By attaching the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are positioned below the first starting opening 2002 and start. It will be in the state arranged between mouth unit 2100 and side slope 2300. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and delivers it to the delivery port 3151 of the ball guiding unit 3150 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

[5-8c. Side slope]
Next, the side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the gaming area 5a from the center in the up-down direction and slightly downward from the front upper left of the side unit 2200 in front view. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 protruding forward and extending left and right so that the right end side in front view is lower.

  The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf 2301 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also located to the left. In the state where the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the shelf 2301 is located above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, the side slope 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2301. There is a possibility that a game ball will be accepted in any of the three general winning openings 2001 of the starting opening 2002 and the side unit 2200.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the attacker unit in the front unit cut from a substantial center in the front-rear direction in the game area and viewed from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is disposed in the game area 5a, at the lower right corner in front view, to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in front view, and attached to the front of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning opening 2001 out of the four general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, a second winning opening 2006, and a sub-out opening 2007. It has.

  As shown in FIG. 126 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has a bottom in which the outer shape in a front view is inclined such that the right end is located slightly above, a right side which rises substantially perpendicularly from the right end of the bottom, and an upper end of the right side. And an oblique side extending obliquely so as to connect the left end of the base. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls flow (pass) up and down is arranged at the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. . In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second big winning opening 2006 which can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always left open at the lower left of the second big winning opening 2006. A sub-out port 2007 is provided. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a first winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward slightly to the left of the sub-out opening 2007 and is always opened upward at the lower left of the first winning opening 2005. General winning opening 2001 is arranged.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start-up port sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball received by the second start-up port 2004, A first special winning opening sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball received in the winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting a gaming ball received in the second winning opening 2006 are provided. Have.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port door 2411 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting lot 2002 or the second starting lot A second special winning opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by accepting a game ball into the starting opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate passage 2420 extending vertically at the upper right corner in the front view and through which game balls can flow, a left side passage 2421 extending vertically at the left side of the gate passage 2420 and through which game balls can flow, A right side passage 2422 that extends vertically on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and through which a game ball can flow, and a lower left end portion below the right side passage 2422 below the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422. An attacker passage 2423 that extends to the left from the left side passage 2421 so that game balls can flow therethrough, and extends to the left below the left side of the attacker passage 2423 so that the left end side is lower and guides the game ball. A possible attacker shelf 2424.

  In the gate passage 2420, the gate portion 2003 is arranged near the upper part, and the second starting port 2004 is arranged in the lower part. The left and right walls of the gate passage 2420 penetrate between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In the attacker passage 2423, a second big winning opening 2006 is opened on the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421. In the attacker passage 2423, a second special winning opening door 2413 for opening and closing the second special winning opening 2006 forms a part of the bottom wall. Further, the attacker passage 2423 has a left end, which is the lowest, opening downward. The second big winning opening 2006 is opened with a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker shelf 2424 has a first special winning opening 2005 opened, and a part of a first special winning opening door 2412 which closes the first special winning opening 2005 so that it can be opened and closed. The first big winning opening 2005 is opened with a width about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. At the right end of the attacker shelf 2424, a sub-out port 2007 is open. Further, one general winning opening 2001 is opened at the lower left of the left end of the attacker shelf 2424.

  The second starting port door 2411 is capable of closing the second starting port 2004 that is open frontward from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. By rotating (rotating) such that the upper side moves forward, the second starting port door 2411 opens the second starting port 2004, closes the gate passage 2420, and flows down in the gate passage 2420. The game balls that have been guided can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 is formed so as to rotate by driving a starting port solenoid (not shown). When the starting port solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the second starting port 2004 is closed, and the starting port is closed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the second start port 2004 is opened.

  The first large winning opening door 2412 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and lower at the left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first special winning opening door 2412 closes the first special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attacker shelf 2424, and plays a game ball flowing down on the attacker shelf 2424 to the left. To be discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. In addition, the first special winning opening door 2412 opens the first special winning opening 2005 by retreating, and the game ball flowing down onto the attacker shelf 2424 via the attacker passage 2423 or the like is moved to the first special winning opening. 2005 can be accepted. The first special winning opening door 2412 is formed so as to move forward and backward by driving a first attacker solenoid (not shown), and closes the first special winning opening 2005 when the first attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). When the first attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the first winning port 2005 is opened.

  The second large winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and rearward and having a lower left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second winning opening door 2413 moves forward to close the second winning opening 2006 and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2423 to form a gate passage 2420, a left side passage 2421, and a right side passage. The game ball that has passed through any of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. In addition, the second special winning opening door 2413 can open the second special winning opening 2006 by retreating, and allow the game balls that have entered the attacker passage 2423 to be accepted by the second special winning opening 2006 with a high probability. it can. The second winning port door 2413 is formed so as to move forward and backward by driving a second attacker solenoid (not shown), and closes the second winning port 2006 when the second attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). When the second attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the second winning port 2006 is opened.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 can flow, a first reception port 2431 and a second reception port 2432 that are open at the bottom of the internal passage 2430. A sorting piece 2433 for distributing a game ball to either the first reception port 2431 or the second reception port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and a first reception sensor 2434 for detecting a game ball received in the first reception port 2431. And a second reception sensor 2435 for detecting a game ball received in the second reception 2432.

  The internal passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second special winning opening sensor 2402. The first receiving port 2431 is disposed directly below a portion of the second winning winning port sensor 2402 through which a game ball passes, and the second receiving port 2432 is disposed on the right side of the first receiving port 2431 in a front view. . The distributing piece 2433 is disposed between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and is rotatably mounted around an axis having a lower side extending forward and backward. The sorting piece 2433 rises vertically and connects the second special winning opening 2006 and the first reception port 2431 to each other, and the upper side moves to the left as viewed from the front and the left side wall of the internal passage 2430 is formed. It is attached so as to rotate between a state in which the second large winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are communicated with each other (or approach). The distributing piece 2433 is formed so as to be rotated by driving a distributing solenoid (not shown). When the distributing solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431, and the distributing piece is distributed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

  In this attacker unit 2400, with the gate passage 2420 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2420 is located immediately below an opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role 2500 described later. 2003 is located above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500. The first winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located lower than the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  Next, the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. When assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500, so that even if a game ball is released from the stage 2530, the gate portion 2003 is moved. It does not pass. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center role 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. The upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed opens right below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role object 2500 and thus is open on the right side of the center role item 2500. The game ball that has flowed down the gate enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability and passes through the gate portion 2003.

Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second starting port door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004 immediately below. At this time, if the second starting port door 2411 is turned forward and is in the open position, the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second starting port door 2411 and The user is guided to the start port 2004 and received by the second start port 2004.
The second starting port door 2411 responds to a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003 (a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit”). At that time, by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting port door 2411, and the like, the game ball itself that has drawn the “normal hit” itself is accepted into the second starting port 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor.

  In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game passing through the gate portion 2003 In rare cases, the ball may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 through a portion that is in communication. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 does not always pass in front of the second starting door 2411.

  When the game ball flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 arranged on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420, It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

  The game ball discharged to the attacker passage 2423 from any of the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422 is guided to the left along the slope of the attacker passage 2423, and is downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. Released to At this time, if the second special winning opening door 2413 closing the second special winning opening 2006 retreats and the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, the game ball released into the attacker passage 2423 is With a high probability, it will be accepted in the second grand prize opening 2006. The game ball received in the second special winning opening 2006 is sent to the internal passage 2430 after being detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2402, and is distributed by the sorting piece 2433 to the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432. It is distributed to either.

  The game ball received in the first reception port 2431 or the second reception port 2432 is detected by the first reception port sensor 2434 or the second reception port sensor 2435, and then is located below (substrate holder) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. 1200).

  Since the width of the left and right of the second special winning opening 2006 is about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, the second special winning opening door 2413 retreats and the second special winning opening 2006 is formed. Even if it is open, depending on the speed and behavior of the game balls flowing through the attacker passage 2423, the game balls may jump over the second special winning opening 2006 and may not be accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. .

The game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 flows down onto the attacker shelf 2424, is guided to the attacker shelf 2424, and is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424.
At this time, when the first special winning opening door 2412 retreats and the first special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 is received in the first special winning opening 2005. . Therefore, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center role item 2500 while the first special winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball is highly likely to be inserted into the first special winning opening 2005. Can be accepted.

  The game ball received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by a first special winning opening sensor (not shown) and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the gaming panel 1100.

  There is a possibility that the game ball discharged downward from the attacker shelf 2424 may be received in one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the right delivery port 3136 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls not received in the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the center role as viewed from the back. The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view and slightly upward, and is mounted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes, from the front, an effect unit provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire periphery excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that a game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It is provided with an open warp exit 2522 and a stage 2530 capable of rolling a game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then releasing the ball into the game area 5a (see FIG. 120 and the like). .

  The stage 2530 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2530 can discharge a game ball into the game area 5a from the lowest part on both sides of the center formed in a wavy shape.

  The center role 2500 has a chance entrance 2535 in which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2535. A chance exit 2536 for discharging the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 in a state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when a game ball is released from the chance exit 2536, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center role 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in a front view slightly to the left and then discharges the ball downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located directly above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Have been.

  The center role item 2500 is formed such that, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center role 2500, it flows along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center role 2500, and all the game spheres flowing on the right side of the center role 2500 enter the right guide passage 2540. Enter and be guided. Thereby, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role item 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate unit 2003 with a very high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the gaming board viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main component and viewed from the rear. is there. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. In addition, a game board effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back panel 3032, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 in the back view, and a production drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010. And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view 3031.

  The effect drive board 3031 is based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and is based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decorative unit 3200, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit. 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second winning port sensor 2402, a first receiving port sensor 2434, a second receiving port sensor 2435, and a second starting port sensor (not shown). ), First winning port sensor (not shown), starting port solenoid (not shown), first attacker solenoid (not shown), second attacker solenoid (not shown), distribution solenoid (shown) Are omitted), the connection with the general winning opening sensor 3111, the first starting opening sensor 3112, and the magnetic sensor (not shown) is relayed.

  The lower left relay board 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the rear left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay board 3034 connects the effect drive substrate 3031 to the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the upper back movable effect unit 3500, and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. Is being relayed.

  The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of each of the effect drive board 3031, the panel relay board 3032, the lower left relay board 3033, and the lower right relay board 3034. A board cover 3035, a panel relay board cover 3036, a lower left relay board cover 3037, and a lower right relay board cover 3038 are provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the left side and the bottom side in front view, and the back unit is attached to the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached respectively to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 It has a rear-side movable effect unit 3500 attached thereto, and a lower-back movable effect unit 3700 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is recessed from the inside of the frame to the outside on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, and is inserted. And a notch portion 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable up and down.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each of the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 132 (a) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 132 (b) is an enlarged sectional view cut along line TT in FIG. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to extend from the left side to the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010 in front view.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L-shape (crescent shape) along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and a transparent unit base 3110 attached to the front end of the back box 3010; A general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting a gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000, A magnetic sensor (not shown) capable of detecting illegal magnetism applied from the outside in the game area 5a.

  The front decoration unit 3100 extends vertically along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front of the unit base 3110. A lower back decoration unit 3130 extending right and left along the side of the box 3010 and attached to the front of the unit base 3110, and a unit base disposed at the lower left side of the lower back decoration unit 3130 in front view. A ball guiding unit 3150 attached to the front of the 3110.

  As shown in the figure, the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100 has a translucent flat back front left decorative ornament 3121 having a decoration of “Do-do-do” and a back front left decorative. A transparent flat front left back light guiding lens 3122 mounted on the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs 3123a capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the front left left light guiding lens 3122 are mounted. And a back front left decorative substrate 3123 (see FIG. 132 (b)).

  The back front left light guide lens 3122 has a plurality of conical reflecting portions 3122a on the rear surface of the back front left decorative decorative body 3121 behind the decoration of the letter "C". Light that has entered the inside from the left side of the back front left light guide lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3122a, and the back front left decorative ornament placed in front of the back front left light guide lens 3122. The 3121 can be decorated with light emission in a planar manner.

  The lower back front decoration unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is disposed so as to correspond to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and has a lower back front center lens 3131 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface. , A lower front lower left lens 3132 and a lower front lower right lens 3133, which are respectively disposed on the left and right sides of the lower front lower center lens 3131 and have a predetermined three-dimensional decoration on the front surface, and a lower front lower center lens 3131. , A back front lower left lens 3132 and a back front lower right lens 3133, and a back front lower decorative board 3134 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the back front lower decorative board, the lower front lower center lens 3131, the lower front lower left lens 3132, and the lower front right lens 3133 can be illuminated and decorated in an independent state.

  The lower front lower decorative unit 3130 is opened forward at the upper center of the lower front lower central lens 3131, and a game ball received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and guided to the rear is provided. A central delivery port 3135 that can be entered, and a game ball that is opened forward at the right outside of the lower part of the lower front lower central lens 3131 and that is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and guided backward. And a possible left delivery port 3137. The game ball that has entered the central delivery port 3135 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3112. In addition, the game ball that has entered the right delivery port 3136 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3111.

  The ball guiding unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be disposed below the back front lower left lens 3132 in the back front lower decoration unit 3130. The ball guiding unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is opened forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery ports 3151 through which game balls can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls entering the inside from the delivery port 3151 downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game ball that has entered the inside from the delivery port 3151 is discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Uranaka movable production unit]
Next, the back inside movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rear middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear wall inside the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The back middle movable effecting unit 3200 is arranged on the left side in front view, extends vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and has a back middle left decorative body 3210 having a predetermined decoration; , A back middle right decorative body 3220 extending vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and having a predetermined decoration, and an opening 3010a in the rear wall of the back box 3010. A back middle drive unit 3250 attached to the upper and lower outer sides to move the middle back decoration 3210 and the middle right decoration 3220 in the left-right direction.

  The back middle left decorative body 3210 is a flat back middle left decorative lens 3211 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front and a translucent flat middle left decorative lens 3211, and is arranged on the rear side of the back middle left decorative lens 3211. A back middle left decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back middle attached to the back of the middle back left decorative lens 3211 so as to cover the rear surface of the middle back left decorative board. And a left decorative body base 3212. Although not shown, the back center left decorative body base 3212 is provided with a rack gear at its lower end that extends left and right and has gear teeth formed upward. The back center left decorative body 3210 can cause the back center left decorative lens 3211 to emit light by making the LED on the back center left decorative substrate emit light.

  The back middle right decorative body 3220 is disposed on the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a translucent plate-shaped back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface and on the front side. A back middle right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back middle attached to the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 so as to cover the rear surface of the back middle right decorative board. And a right decoration base 3222. Although not shown, the back middle right decorative body base 3222 includes a rack gear at the lower end that extends left and right and has gear teeth formed downward. The back middle right decorative body 3220 can cause the back middle right decorative lens 3221 to emit light by making the LED on the back middle right decorative substrate emit light.

  The back center left decorative lens 3211 and the back center right decorative lens 3221 of the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and at the approximate center in the vertical direction, a game board. 5 is formed in a shape like a hollow on the side near the center in the left-right direction.

  The back middle drive unit 3250 is mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and supports the upper ends of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A flat unit base 3252 that supports the lower ends of the middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and an opening 3010 a attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252 and inside the back box 3010. , A back-side drive motor 3254 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3252 such that a rotating shaft projects between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252, The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted, and it is rotatable on the front surface of the mounting base 3253. Attached to and pinion gear rack and is engaged in the rack gear and the back in the right decorations 3220 of the back in the left ornamental body 3210 so as to be sandwiched from above and below (not shown) in which provided with a.

  In the back middle movable effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the left and right back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in a retracted position where they are most separated from each other. In this state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 114 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view by driving the back center drive motor 3254 from the normal state, the rack gear of the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 meshing with the pinion gear are rotated. Due to the rack gear, the back center left decorative body 3210 moves to the right and the back center right decorative body 3220 moves to the left.

  As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 that have been separated from each other move so as to approach each other, and stop moving immediately before they come into contact with each other. In this state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are located at substantially the center (appearance position) on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back center left decorative body 3210 The decoration with the back middle right decorative body 3220 is united to form one large decoration (decoration imitating cherry blossom petals) (see FIG. 170).

[5-9d. Back left movable directing unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left outside of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable rendering unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable rendering unit 3400 with an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back left movable rendering unit 3300 includes a back left decorative body 3310 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back left rotation drive unit 3330 that rotates the back left decorative body 3310 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back left moving drive unit 3350 that is attached and moves the upper end side of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 in the left and right direction, and guides the lower end side of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 that is mounted in the back box 3010 to be movable in the left and right direction. And a back left upper decorative body 3390 attached to the front side of the back left moving drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back left decorative body 3310 includes a first decorative surface 3311 on which a relief of a statue of Nio is formed, a second decorative surface 3312 on which a predetermined character decoration is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3312. And a third decorative surface 3313 on which a decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed to have translucency. Although not shown, the back left decorative body 3310 has a cylindrical shaft at the lower end.

  The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to a vertically extending movement base 3331 that is mounted to be movable in the left-right direction by the back left movement drive unit 3350, and is attached to a lower portion of the movement base 3331 so as to protrude forward, and is a back left decoration. A lower rotating base 3332 rotatably supporting a lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotating base (not shown) attached to an upper portion of the moving base 3331 so as to protrude above the back left decorative body 3310; A rotating shaft that is attached to the upper rotating base so as to protrude downward, and a rotating shaft that penetrates the upper rotating base is attached to the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310 is a back left rotating drive motor (not shown). The motor cover 3333 attached to the moving base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotary drive motor, and the inside of the back left decorative body 3310 The lower end with being location includes a Urahidari decorative substrate 3334 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3332 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3331 has a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decorative body 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the lower left lower guide rail 3370.

  The back left decorative substrate 3334 is disposed inside the back left decorative body 3310 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the upper back side of the back left decorative substrate 3334 is relatively rotatably supported below the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. Thereby, only the back left decorative body 3310 is formed to rotate by the driving of the back left rotation drive motor. In addition, the LED of the back left decorative board 3334 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 located in front of the back left decorative board 3334 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) emits light. be able to.

  The back left movement drive unit 3350 is provided with a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft projects rearward through the unit base 3351. The rear left movement drive motor 3352 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotation shaft of the back left movement drive motor 3352, and the rear left rotation A pinion gear (not shown) meshed with the rack gear of the drive unit 3330 and rotatably mounted on the unit base 3351; and a moving base of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 mounted on the lower front surface of the unit base 3351 Slide rail for mounting 3331 movably in the left and right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the pinion gear is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the back left movement drive motor 3352 via the drive gear 3353 by the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left rotation drive unit 3350 is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (the back left decorative body 3310) can be moved rightward.

  The lower back left guide rail 3370 is attached near the left end below the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower back left guide rail 3370 extends left and right, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower back left guide rail 3370 inserts a protrusion projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 into the opening on the upper surface to guide the protrusion slidably in the left-right direction. Can be.

  The back upper left decorative body 3390 includes a translucent back left upper decorative lens 3391 on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and a unit base 3351 of the back left moving drive unit 3350 attached to the rear side of the rear upper left decorative lens 3391. A decorative body base 3392 attached to the front surface, and a rear upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3392 and the upper left decorative lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper left decorative body 3390 can make the back upper left decorative lens 3391 emit light by emitting the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate.

  In a normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state where the back left rotation drive unit 3330 (the back left decorative body 3310) has moved to the leftmost position (evacuated position) by the back left movement drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decorative body 3310 is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100, and can be almost visually recognized from the front by being blocked by the back front left decorative unit 3120. No (see FIG. 114 etc.).

  In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decorative body 3310 can be moved rightward through the back left rotation drive unit 3330. When reaching the right end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the left movement drive unit 3350, the movement stops. In this appearance position, the back left decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display. It is located near the left end on the front surface of the device 1600 and is visible through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  In addition, the back left movable rendering unit 3300 rotates the back left decoration body 3310 with the back left rotation drive motor of the back left rotation drive unit 3330, or the first decoration surface 3311 and the second decoration of the back left decoration body 3310. The rotation can be stopped or any one of the surface 3312 and the third decorative surface 3313 can face forward. The back left decorative body 3310 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearing position.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outside of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back right movable rendering unit 3400 includes a back right decorative body 3410 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back right rotation drive unit 3430 for rotating the back right decorative body 3410 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back-right moving drive unit 3450 that is attached and moves the upper end of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction, and guides the lower end of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 that is mounted in the back box 3010 to be movable in the left-right direction. A back right lower guide rail 3470 and a back upper right decorative body 3490 attached to the front side of the back right moving drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back right decorative body 3410 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back right decorative body 3410 includes a first decorative surface 3411 on which a relief of a statue of Nioh is formed, a second decorative surface 3412 on which a predetermined character decoration is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3412. And a third decorative surface 3413 on which decoration is formed. The back right decorative body 3410 is formed to have a light-transmitting property. Although not shown, the back right decorative body 3410 has a cylindrical shaft at the lower end.

  The back right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to a vertically extending movement base 3431 that is mounted to be movable in the left-right direction by the back right movement drive unit 3450, and is attached to a lower portion of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude forward, and is a back right decoration. A lower rotating base 3432 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotating base (not shown) mounted on an upper portion of the moving base 3431 so as to protrude above the back right decorative body 3410; A rotating shaft that is attached to the upper rotating base so as to protrude downward, and a rotating shaft that penetrates the upper rotating base is attached to the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410 is a back right rotating drive motor (not shown). The motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor and the inside of the back right decorative body 3410 The lower end with being location includes a back right decorative substrate 3434 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3432 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3431 has a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3432 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decorative body 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a projection that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the rear lower right guide rail 3470.

  The back right decorative substrate 3434 is disposed inside the back right decorative body 3410 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not illustrated, the back right decorative board 3434 is supported at the upper end below the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410 so as to be relatively rotatable. Thus, only the back right decorative body 3410 is formed to rotate by the driving of the back right rotation drive motor. In addition, the LED of the back right decorative board 3434 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back right decorative body 3410 located in front of the back right decorative board 3434 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) emits light. be able to.

  The back right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft projects rearward through the unit base 3451. , A back right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3451, a drive gear 3453 attached to the rotating shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and a back gear A pinion gear (not shown) meshed with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and rotatably mounted on the unit base 3451, and a moving base of the rear right rotation drive unit 3430 mounted on the lower front part of the unit base 3451 Slide rail for mounting 3431 movably in the left and right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the pinion gear is rotated clockwise in front view by the back right movement drive motor 3452 via the drive gear 3453 by the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right rotation drive unit is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) can be moved to the left.

  The lower right back guide rail 3470 is attached near the right end below the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower right back guide rail 3470 extends left and right and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. By inserting a projection projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the rear right rotation drive unit 3430 into the opening on the upper surface of the lower right back guide rail 3470, the projection is slidably guided in the left and right direction. be able to.

  The back upper right decorative body 3490 has a translucent back upper right decorative lens 3490 on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and a unit base 3451 of the back right moving drive unit 3450 attached to the back right upper back decorative lens 3490. A decorative body base 3492 attached to the front surface, and a back upper right decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3492 and the back upper right decorative lens 3491 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper right decorative body 3490 can make the back upper right decorative lens 3491 emit light by making the LED on the back upper right decorative substrate emit light.

  In the normal state, the back right movable effecting unit 3400 is in a state where the back right rotation drive unit 3430 (the back right decorative body 3410) is moved to the rightmost position (retreat position) by the back right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3410 is located behind the right side of the center role 2500 and a part thereof can be visually recognized through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 114 and the like). reference).

  In this normal state, by driving the back right movement drive motor 3452 of the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right decorative body 3410 can be moved rightward through the back right rotation drive unit 3430. When reaching the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the right movement drive unit 3450, the movement stops. In this appearance position, the back right decorative body 3410 is located on the left side of the right side of the center role item 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and is located on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located near the right end, and is in a state where the whole can be visually recognized through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  In addition, the back right movable rendering unit 3400 rotates the back right decorative body 3410 with the back right rotary drive motor of the back right rotary drive unit 3430, or the first decorative surface 3411 and the second decoration of the back right decorative body 3410. The rotation can be stopped or any one of the surface 3412 and the third decorative surface 3413 faces forward. The back right decorative body 3410 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearing position.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of movable production unit on the back]
Next, the overall configuration of the rear movable effect unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 158. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit mainly disassembled for each constituent unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit for each main constituent unit and viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. The back upper movable rendering unit 3500 is attached to the inside of the back box 3010 at the front of the rear wall above the opening 3010a.

  The back upper movable rendering unit 3500 includes a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 having a predetermined character decoration, and a back upper second decorative body unit having a different character decoration from the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. 3530; a back upper third decorative body unit 3550 having a different character decoration from the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530; and a back upper first decorative body at the center in the longitudinal direction. The unit 3510 is attached so as to be rotatable relative to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 extend in the front-rear direction near both ends in the longitudinal direction, respectively. A back-upside rotation base unit 3570 that is mounted to be rotatable relative to the axis about A decoration unit 3510 that is non-rotatably mounted, and a back-up and down unit 3600 that lifts and lowers the back upper first decoration unit 3510 and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 and is mounted in the back box 3010. I have.

[5-9f-1. Back upper first decorative unit]
Next, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the front and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 of the back upper movable effecting unit 3500 has a rear end non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the rear elevating unit 3600.

  The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512, which are formed in such a way as to form predetermined characters in one-to-one pairs and have translucency. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 which is disposed on the rear side of the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and has a predetermined decoration and has a light-transmitting property; A first upper decorative substrate 3514 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the rear surface of the first upper decorative substrate 3514. And the first decorative base 3515 in the shape of a flat plate. Note that the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is provided with a decoration imitating lightning.

  The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the lower rear portion of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a left end on the left outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a first left movable decorative lens 3511. A first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a extending left and right on the upper side, a slit 3516b penetrating back and forth under the rack gear 3516a and extending left and right, and a first lower arm 3516 A lower arm presser 3517 which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3516b and cooperates with the first decorative body base 3515 to slidably mount the first lower arm 3516 in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a right end on the right outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512. A first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3518b extending left and right through the front and rear above the rack gear 3518a; An upper arm retainer 3519 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3518b and cooperating with the first decorative body base 3515 to attach the first upper arm 3518 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a that meshes with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3520a. A first opening / closing gear member 3520 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3520b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 is provided.

  The upper back first decorative body unit 3510 is a flat plate-like member extending vertically in the front left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a first opening / closing gear member on the right side. It has a vertically extending drive rack gear 3521a that meshes with the 3520 drive gear portion 3520b, a receiving boss 3521b that projects cylindrically rearward from the lower portion of the rear surface, and a slit 3521c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side. The first opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521 are attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and the first opening / closing arm 3521 is vertically moved in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. An open / close arm presser 3522 slidably mounted.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has a left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a right end attached to the first upper arm 3518, so that the first upper arm 3518 can be viewed from the front left. A first opening / closing spring 3523 biased to move toward the first direction, and a first attachment base 3524 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520. And a horizontal lock hole 3525a which is attached to the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and is opened at the outer peripheral surface on the right side, and is formed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the horizontal lock hole 3525a. A vertical lock hole 3525b, which is open at the bottom, and a mounting shaft portion 3525c that projects cylindrically rearward behind the vertical lock hole 3525b. End and a, a first mounting shaft member 3525 attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back on the lift unit 3600.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 will be described in detail. The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is located between a closed position in which the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 approach each other and an open position in which they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, a first upper arm 3518 to which a first right movable decorative lens 3512 is attached is disposed above a first lower arm 3516 to which a first left movable decorative lens 3511 is attached. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with a rack gear 3516a extending left and right upward, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with a rack gear 3518a extending left and right downward. The rack gear 3516a of the arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 face each other. Then, between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is connected to the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. Each is engaged. Thus, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 (the transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens are moved via the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). , The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in directions away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and extends vertically so as to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b. A first opening / closing arm 3521 having a drive rack gear 3521a is provided. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is mounted so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Then, since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is disposed on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 in a front view, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, it slides downward, When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates clockwise in front view, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has the first opening / closing spring 3523 that urges the first upper arm 3518 to move to the left, a force acts on the first opening / closing arm 3521. When not performed (in a normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid to the left by the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative The lens 3512 is in a closed position where the lens 3512 is in contact with each other. In the closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3521a of the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 139 (a)).

When the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward from the closed position to resist the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates clockwise in front view, The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide in directions away from each other via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518.
When the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 139 (b)). The stop of the slide at this open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521, at the end of the long hole. The slide is regulated by the lower arm press 3517, the upper arm press 3519, and the opening / closing arm press 3522 abutting on each other.

  Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Is located in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other, and the first movable movable lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

  In addition, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 causes the LED of the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 to emit light as appropriate, so that the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the first fixed decorative lens are provided. 3513 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the LED on the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 emits light via the first fixed decorative lens 3513. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position and the LED on the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 emits light, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3511 are turned on. Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing the decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-2. Second decorative body unit on the back]
Next, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. FIG. 140A is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 140B is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the front and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 143 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 of the back upper movable effecting unit 3500 has a rear end near the one end in the longitudinal direction of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 (near the right end when in the horizontal position) and the front-rear direction. Is mounted so as to be rotatable about an axis extending to

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 which are formed in such a way as to form a predetermined character in one-to-one pairs and have translucency. A second fixed decorative lens 3533 which is disposed behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and has a predetermined decoration and has a light-transmitting property, and a second fixed decorative lens 3533 A second upper decorative substrate 3534 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the rear surface of the second upper decorative substrate 3534. And a flat second decorative body base 3535. Note that a decoration imitating lightning is formed on the second fixed decorative lens 3533.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and has a left end on the left outer side of the second decorative body base 3535 and a second left movable decorative lens 3531. And a second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b penetrating back and forth below the rack gear 3536a and extending left and right. A lower arm presser 3537 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3536b, and cooperating with the second decorative body base 3535 to attach the second lower arm 3536 slidably in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and has a right end on the right outside of the second decorative body base 3535 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532. And a second upper arm 3538 having a rack gear 3538a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3538b penetrating back and forth above and above the rack gear 3538a and extending left and right. An upper arm presser 3539 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3538b and cooperating with the second decorative body base 3535 to attach the second upper arm 3538 slidably in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3540a that meshes with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3540a. A second opening / closing gear member 3540 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3540b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 is provided.

  In addition, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 is a flat plate-shaped left and right extending side of the second open / close gear member 3540 at the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and extends on the right side. A vertically extending drive rack gear 3541a that meshes with a drive gear portion 3540b of 3540, a receiving boss 3541b that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the upper end of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c that extends vertically through and near the left side. And a second opening / closing arm 3541 having an opening / closing arm 3541. The second opening / closing arm 3541 is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541. And an open / close arm presser 3542 mounted to be slidable in the direction.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and a right end attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, so that the second lower arm 3536 can be viewed from the right in front view. A second opening / closing spring 3543 urged to move toward the second direction, and a second attachment base 3544 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And The second attachment base 3544 is attached to a second drive link gear member 3573 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Next, the movement of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 moves between the closed position where the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 approach each other and the open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, a second upper arm 3538 to which a second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached is disposed above a second lower arm 3536 to which a second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. In the second lower arm 3536, a rack gear 3536a extending left and right is provided upward, and in the second upper arm 3538, a rack gear 3538a extending left and right is provided downward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 face each other. Then, between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is connected to the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. Each is engaged. Thus, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3531 via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise in front view, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). , The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in directions away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  Further, in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 has the drive gear portion 3540b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and extends vertically so as to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b. A second opening / closing arm 3541 having a driving rack gear 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. And since the 2nd opening / closing arm 3541 is arrange | positioned at the front view left side of the 2nd opening / closing gear member 3540, when it rotates the 2nd opening / closing gear member 3540 in a front view counterclockwise direction, it will slide down, When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates clockwise in front view, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has the second opening / closing spring 3543 that urges the second lower arm 3536 to move rightward, a force acts on the second opening / closing arm 3541. When not performed (in a normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid rightward by the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative The lens 3532 is in a closed position where the lens 3532 is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3541a of the second opening / closing arm 3541 (see FIG. 143 (a)).

When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward from the closed position to oppose the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates clockwise in front view, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide in directions away from each other via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538.
When the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 143 (b)). The stop of the slide at this open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541, at the end of the long hole. The slide is regulated by the lower arm press 3537, the upper arm press 3539, and the opening / closing arm press 3542 abutting on each other.

  Therefore, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 in the closed position. Is located in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other, and The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 becomes visible.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 causes the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 to emit light appropriately, so that the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the second fixed decorative lens are provided. 3533 can be illuminated as appropriate. Specifically, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, when the LED of the second upper decorative substrate 3534 emits light, the light passes through the second fixed decorative lens 3533. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position and the LED of the second upper decorative substrate 3534 emits light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-3. Back upper third decorative body unit]
Next, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. FIG. 144A is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 144B is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the front and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 147 (b) is a drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The rear upper third decorative body unit 3550 of the rear upper movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end near the end opposite to the rear upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the rear upper rotating base unit 3570 (horizontal position). (In the vicinity of the left end at the time of), it is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 having a light-transmitting decoration in which decorations for predetermined characters are formed in one-to-one pairs. A third fixed decorative lens 3553 which is disposed on the rear side of the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and has a predetermined decoration and has transparency, and a third fixed decorative lens 3553 A third upper decorative board 3554, which is disposed on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and is attached to the rear side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the rear side of the third upper decorative board 3554. And a third decorative base 3555 in the form of a flat plate. It should be noted that the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is formed with a decoration imitating lightning.

  In addition, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the rear lower part of the third decorative body base 3555 and has a left end on the left outer side of the third decorative body base 3555 and a third left movable decorative lens 3551. A third lower arm 3556 having a rack gear 3556a extending left and right on the upper side thereof, a slit 3556b penetrating back and forth below the rack gear 3556a and extending left and right, and a third lower arm 3556 A lower arm presser 3557 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3556b, and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to slidably mount the third lower arm 3556 in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the rear upper portion of the third decorative body base 3555 and has a right end on the right outer side of the third decorative body base 3555 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552. And a third upper arm 3558 having a rack gear 3558a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3558b extending left and right through the front and rear above the rack gear 3558a, and a third upper arm 3558. An upper arm presser 3559 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3558b and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to attach the third upper arm 3558 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3560a that meshes with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3560a. A third opening / closing gear member 3560 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3560b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 is provided.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is a flat plate-like extending vertically on the left side in the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, and has a third opening / closing gear member on the right side. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having a vertically extending drive rack gear 3561a meshing with a 3560 drive gear portion 3560b, a slit 3561c penetrating back and forth near the left side, and a slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561. An opening / closing arm presser 3562 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to attach the third opening / closing arm 3561 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. .

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and a right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, so that the third lower arm 3556 can be seen from the right in front view. A third opening / closing spring 3563 urged to move toward the third opening / closing member 3560, and a third attachment base 3564 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. And The third attachment base 3564 is attached to a third drive link gear member 3578 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is located between a closed position where the left and right third left movable decorative lenses 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 approach each other and is in an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, a third upper arm 3558 to which a third right movable decorative lens 3552 is mounted is disposed above a third lower arm 3556 to which a third left movable decorative lens 3551 is mounted. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. In the third lower arm 3556, a rack gear 3556a extending left and right is provided upward, and in the third upper arm 3558, a rack gear 3558a extending left and right is provided downward. The rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 face each other. Then, between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is connected to the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. Each is engaged. Thus, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise in front view, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3552 approaches each other (a direction of the closed position). , The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in directions away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  In the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having a driving rack gear 3561a is provided. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Then, since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is disposed on the left side in the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward, When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates clockwise in front view, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 mutually move. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has the third opening / closing spring 3563 which urges the third lower arm 3556 to move rightward, a force acts on the third opening / closing arm 3561. When not performed (in a normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid rightward by the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative The lens 3552 is in a closed position where the lens 3552 is in contact with each other. In the closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3561a of the third opening / closing arm 3561 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

When the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward from this closed position so as to oppose the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates clockwise in front view, and The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide in directions away from each other via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558.
When the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 147 (b)). The stop of the slide at the open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561, at the end of the long hole. The lower arm presser 3557, the upper arm presser 3559, and the opening / closing arm presser 3562 abut on each other to restrict the slide.

  Accordingly, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the third upper decorative body unit 3550 includes the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is located in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated from each other and the third movable decorative lens 3551 is located between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 becomes visible.

  In addition, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 appropriately emits the LED of the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, so that the third left movable decorative lens 3551, the third right movable decorative lens 3552, and the third fixed decorative lens are provided. 3553 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the LED on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554 emits light when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the light passes through the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position and the LED on the third upper decorative board 3554 emits light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3551 are turned on. Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing the decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-4. Rotating base unit on the back]
Next, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the gear configuration of the rear upper rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front a state in which the operating lever of the upper back rotating base unit is in the operating position, and FIG. 152 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position.

  The back-upside rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable production unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit in the back-up / down unit so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are attached so as to be relatively rotatable around axes extending in the front-rear direction, respectively.

The back upper rotation base unit 3570 extends in parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating front and rear in the center in the longitudinal direction, and front and rear portions near both ends in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The second and third holes 3571b and 3571c penetrating through the first and third holes 3571a, and the cylindrical portion protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the first hole 3571a and is rotatably mounted on the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600. It has a back-up rotating base with 3571d. The first hole 3571a (the inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed to have a size that allows the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 to pass therethrough. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed to be slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a and have the same size as each other. Further, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed near the right end and near the left end, respectively, when viewed from the front when the upper back rotating base 3571 extends horizontally (at the horizontal position). I have.
In the following, a description will be given of a state in which the upper back rotation base 3571 extends horizontally.

  The upper back rotation base unit 3570 includes a rotation base driven gear 3572 that is attached to the rear side of the upper back rotation base 3571 and extends in a semicircular shape concentrically with the center of the first hole 3571a. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is formed in the form of an upper half with respect to the ring whose central axis is extended back and forth, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is mounted such that a gap is formed between the rotation base driven gear 3572 and the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d. The rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with a rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is formed into an annular shaft portion 3573a rotatably inserted from the front into the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotation base 3571, and a concentric fan shape from the front end of the shaft portion 3573a. A second drive link gear member 3573 having a second link gear portion 3573b formed thereon and having a front surface to which the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the second upper decorative body unit 3530 is mounted; A pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. In the second drive link gear member 3573, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed to have a larger diameter than the second hole 3571b. The second link gear portion 3573b is formed at the same pitch as the center link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600 at the same pitch. The second drive link gear member 3573 has a pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b, so that the movement of the second drive link gear member 3573 in the forward and backward directions with respect to the second hole 3571b is restricted. It is mounted rotatably in the state.

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in the front view of the second hole 3571b, and the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573. A second first link gear 3575 in the form of a spur gear meshing with 3573b, and a second link gear 3575 for second rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper back base 3571 on the left side in front view of the first link gear 3575 for second A second second link gear 3576 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second first link gear 3575, and rotatable rearward on the left side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in the front view of the second second link gear 3576. And a spur gear-shaped third link gear for second use 3577 meshed with the second link gear for second use 3576.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second first link gear 3575 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the back upper rotation base 3571. The left end side of the second third link gear 3577 is close to the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the upper back rotating base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with a central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is formed into an annular shaft portion 3578a rotatably inserted from the front into the third hole 3571c of the upper back rotation base 3571, and a concentric fan shape from the front end of the shaft portion 3578a. A third drive link gear member 3578 having a third link gear portion 3578b formed thereon and having a front surface to which a rear surface of a third mounting base 3564 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is mounted; A pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the third link gear portion 3578b has a larger diameter than the third hole 3571c. Further, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed with the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600. The third drive link gear member 3578 has its pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c, whereby the movement of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the forward and backward directions with respect to the third hole 3571c is restricted. It is mounted rotatably in the state.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the front side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the third hole 3571c in front view, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578. The third link gear 3580 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580, and the third link gear 3580 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper back base 3571 on the right side in front view of the third link gear 3580. A third second link gear 3581 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580, and a rotatable rear side of the upper rear base 3571 on the right side of the third second link gear 3581 in a front view. And a third gear third link gear 3582 in the form of a spur gear, which is attached and meshes with the second gear link 3581 for the third gear.

  The third first link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the upper back rotation base 3571. The third link gear for third use 3582 has a right end approaching the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the upper back rotating base 3571. The third third link gear 3582 meshes with a central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the rear lower portion of the upper back rotation base 3571 between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b, and the rotation shaft passes through the upper back rotation base 3571. A working lever drive motor 3584 protruding forward, a spur gear-shaped action lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotating shaft of the action lever drive motor 3584, and an action lever drive gear 3584 meshed with the back upper rotation base A working lever pinion gear 3585 which is rotatably mounted on the front surface of the working lever pinion 3571, and a working lever rack gear 3586a which meshes with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extends left and right; An action lever 3586 attached to the front surface of the rotation base 3571 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction; The lever 3586 restricts the forward movement of the operating lever 3586 and is attached to the front surface of the upper back rotating base 3571, and the operating lever 3586 attached to the front surface of the upper rotating base 3571 in the left and right direction of the operating lever 3586. And an action lever movement detecting sensor 3588 for detecting the movement of the moving lever.

  The operation lever 3586 is connected to the horizontally long rectangular main body portion 3586b having the operation lever rack gear 3586a formed on the lower side thereof, and is connected to the upper side of the main body portion 3586b and extends in a strip shape to the left from the main body portion 3586b. A slide attachment portion 3586c attached to the upper front surface of the back upper rotating base 3571 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction; A lock piece 3586d that can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, a first extension 3586e extending downward from the main body 3586b, and a lock piece 3586d extending from the lower end of the first extension 3586e. The first working portion 3586f protruding leftward and the right side of the upper side of the main body portion 3586b. A second right extension 3586g connected to the vicinity and extending rightward, and a second extension extending from the right end of the second right extension 3586g to a position slightly higher than the first working portion 3586f. A lower extension 3586h, a second working portion 3586i extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the second lower extension 3586h, and a lower end of the first extension 3586e from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c. A third extension 3586j extending downward to substantially the same height, and a third working portion 3586k extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the third extension 3586j are provided (FIG. 152). See).

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front surface of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surfaces of the operation lever drive gear 3584 and the operation lever pinion gear 3585, and a rear upper rotation base 3571. The lower back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590, which is attached to the lower surface of the first hole 3571a on the front surface and detects the rotation position of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, and the front side of the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590. A back upper rotating base relay board 3591 attached to the front surface of the back upper rotating base 3571 so as to cover, and a board mounted to the front surface of the back upper rotating base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back upper rotating base relay board 3591 And a cover 3592.

  The upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600. It is. The back upper rotation base relay board 3591 includes a back upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 in the back elevation unit 3600, a back upper second decorative board 3534, a back upper third decorative board 3554, an action lever drive motor 3584, The connection with the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is provided with the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the second first link gear 3575, the second second link gear 3576, and the second third link gear 3577. A rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, a third second link gear 3581, and a third third link gear 3582 are attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side. A rear left gear cover 3594 and a motor cover 3595 attached to the rear side of the upper rear rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the operating lever drive motor 3581.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In the back-upside rotation base unit 3570, the mounting tube portion 3571 d protruding rearward of the back-upside rotation base 3571 is inserted into the shaft tube portion 3611 a of the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 of the back up / down unit 3600. Thus, the movable unit 3610 is attached so as to rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface. Note that the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is restricted from moving forward by the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 that penetrates the mounting cylinder portion 3571d from the front and is mounted on the front surface of the movable unit. Is done. In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 that is rotatably attached to the second hole 3571b of the upper back rotation base 3571, and the upper back rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530. By attaching the rear surface of the two attachment bases 3544, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 can be attached so as to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571. Further, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 which is rotatably attached to the third hole 3571c of the upper back rotation base 3571, and the third upper body 3550 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550. By attaching the rear surface of the three attachment bases 3564, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be attached so as to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  When the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the rear lifting / lowering unit 3600, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable side unit 3610. At the same time, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 (see FIG. 163). Then, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by driving the rotation drive motor 3612 on the back side of the movable unit 3610, the rotation base unit 3570 is rotated through the rotation base driven gear 3572, and the first hole 3571a (attachment). It rotates around an axis extending back and forth about the axis of the cylindrical portion 3571d). The upper back rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position where the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are arranged) extends horizontally, and a vertical position which extends vertically. It can rotate 90 degrees between the positions. In the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is located to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is located below the first hole 3571a. At this horizontal position, the upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable unit 3610 in the back elevation unit 3600.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position around the first hole 3571a, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are moved by the movable unit 3610. Move around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are engaged with the central link gear 3611b, when revolving around the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 revolve around the central link gear 3611b. The gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate by themselves, and each of them rotates relatively to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  Then, when the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted from the second third link gear 3577 to the second second link gear 3576 and the second The second drive link gear member 3573 is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the second first link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the opposite direction to the second third link gear 3577. The third link gear 3581 is transmitted to the third link gear portion 3578b through the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is moved from the third link gear 3581 to the third drive link gear member 3578. And the third link gear 3582 rotates in the opposite direction.

At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the center link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610, the rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611b is performed. The angle is the same as the rotation angle of the upper back rotation base 3571, the second link gear portion 3573b, and the third link gear portion 3578b.
Since the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610 is non-rotatably attached, when the rear upper rotation base 3571 rotates, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b move forward and backward. Instead of rotating about the extended axis, it revolves around the central link gear 3611b. That is, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 holds the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 in the first hole 3571a (movable side It can revolve around the center link gear 3611b) of the unit 3610.

  In addition, when the operating lever drive motor 3583 rotates the operating lever pinion gear 3585 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 moves the operating lever 3586 to the left via the operating lever rack gear 3586a. When the operation lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in front view, the operation lever 3586 can be moved rightward via the operation lever rack gear 3586a.

  More specifically, the main body 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a of the upper back rotation base 3571 in a front view in a state where the operation lever 3586 is assembled to the upper back rotation base unit 3570. The slide mounting portion 3586c of the operation lever 3586 extends leftward to near the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper and outer sides of the first hole 3571a. The first action portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extension 3586g extends to the vicinity of the second hole 3571b above the second hole 3571b. The second lower extension 3586h extends such that the lower end is located below the second hole 3571b. The second action portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower part of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the third extension 3586j extends below the third hole 3571c. Therefore, the third action portion 3586k is located below the third hole 3571c.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the leftmost position (state of the operation position), the lock piece 3586d protruding leftward from the left side of the main body 3586b in a front view. Are protruding into the first hole 3571a. In this state, the left end of the first working portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586j of the operation lever 3586 is detected by the operation lever movement detection sensor 3588.

  On the other hand, in a state where the operation lever 3586 is moved to the rightmost position (a state of the non-operation position), the lock piece 3586d and the first operation portion 3586f are located to the right of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located slightly to the left with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586j of the operation lever 3586 is separated from the operation lever movement detection sensor 3588, and is in a non-detection state.

  The operation lever 3586 is moved to the operation position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 by moving the operation lever 3586 to the operation position. By doing so, the rotation of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 can be restricted (locked). Accordingly, when the operating lever 3586 is moved to the non-operating position, the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and rotates upward and downward with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the rear elevation unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

  In addition, the left end of each of the first operating portion 3586f, the second operating portion 3586i, and the third operating portion 3586k is connected to the first opening / closing arm 3521 of the first decorative body unit 3510 on the back. The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, when the operating lever 3586 is moved to the operating position when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in the vertically extended state, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3541 The arm 3561 can be slid upward.

[5-9f-5. Back elevation unit]
Next, the back ascent / descent unit 3600 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 158. FIG. 153 (a) is a front perspective view of the back up / down unit in the back top movable effect unit, and FIG. 153 (b) is a perspective view of the back up / down unit from behind. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear elevating unit disassembled into a movable unit and a fixed unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind. FIG. 155 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back elevating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up / down unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up / down unit viewed from the back. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the drive system when the movable unit of the back-up / down unit is in the up position, and FIG. 158 (b) is the drive system when the movable unit of the back-up / down unit is in the down position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a system from the front.

  The back elevating / lowering unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back elevating unit 3600 includes a movable unit 3610 on which a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and a back upper rotating base unit 3570 are mounted on a front surface, and a fixed unit mounted on a back box 3010a by moving the movable unit 3610 up and down. 3650.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 is attached to a substantially rectangular movable side base 3611 extending left and right in a front view, and an upper right corner on the front surface of the movable side base 3611. An upper back rotation drive motor 3612 having a cage rotation shaft penetrating the movable side base 3611 and protruding rearward, a rotation drive gear 3613 attached to the rotation shaft of the back upper rotation drive motor 3612, and a rotation drive gear 3613 A rotatable base drive gear 3614 meshed with the rotatable base driven gear 3572 of the upper back rotary base unit 3570 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611.

  The movable unit 3610 includes a motor cover 3615 mounted on the front surface of the movable base 3611 so as to cover the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612, and a flat base mounted on the rear side of the movable base 3611. A cover 3616 and a movable relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616 are provided.

  The movable-side base 3611 of the movable-side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a and the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a that protrudes cylindrically from the lower portion at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A central link gear 3611b that meshes with the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570; And a rotation detecting piece 3611d attached to a lower side of the shaft cylinder portion 3611a on the front surface and detected by the upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the upper rotation base unit 3570. 158).

  The inner diameter of the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a of the movable base 3611 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the upper back rotating base 3571 in the upper rear rotating base unit 3570, and the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d is rotated. It can be inserted as much as possible. The center link gear 3611b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the upper back rotating base unit 3570. At the same pitch.

  The movable-side relay board 3617 includes a back-side relay board 3659 of the fixed-side unit 3650, a first-side decorative board 3514 of the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, and a back-side rotary base relay board 3591 of the back-side rotary base unit 3570. , And the connection with the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612. The elevating slide rail 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached to the left and right ends on the rear surface of the base cover 3617. The lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached to the rear side of the base cover 3617.

  As shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the fixed side unit 3650 of the back elevation unit 3600 includes a substantially square fixed side base 3651 attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and extending left and right as viewed from the front, and a fixed side base 3651. A spur gear-shaped elevating gear portion 3652a, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and rearward at the center of the front surface, and projects forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface of the elevating gear portion 3652a. An elevating drive pin 3652b slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3611c of the movable base 3611, and an elevating rotary body 3652 having an elevating detection piece 3652c extending outward from the elevating gear portion 3652a in a fan shape; A lifting drive gear 3653 meshing with a lifting gear portion 3652a of the lifting rotary body 3652; A 3653 is provided with a backing on elevation drive motor 3654 attached to the rear surface of which the fixed-side base 3651 attached to the rotating shaft.

  The fixed unit 3650 is attached to the front surface of the fixed base 3651 and detects an elevating sensor 3655 for detecting the detecting piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652, and is attached near the left and right sides of the front surface of the fixed base 3651. At the same time, the base cover 3616 of the movable unit 3610 is attached to the front side, and a pair of vertically movable slide rails 3656 which can expand and contract vertically, and both left and right sides of the lower part of the front surface of the fixed side base 3651 outside the pair of vertically movable slide rails 3656 And a pair of elevating springs 3657, the lower end of which is attached to the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 and biases the movable base 3611 to move upward.

  Further, the fixed unit 3650 has an insertion slit 3658a that penetrates back and forth and extends in a semi-circular shape, and through which an elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 can pass, a pair of elevating slide rails. The fixed-side front cover 3658 attached to the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651 so as to cover the front surface of the elevating rotary body 3652 between 3656 and the fixed-side base 3651 is attached to the rear surface of the movable-side unit 3610. The upper relay board 3659 that connects the movable relay board 3617, the back-up / down drive motor 3654, and the elevation sensor 3655 to the lower-right relay board 3034, and the rear side of the back-up relay board 3659 A substrate cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed-side base 3651.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 will be described. The back ascending / descending unit 3600 is rotatably inserted into the shaft tubular portion 3611a of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610, and the mounting tubular portion 3571d of the back upper rotating base 3571 of the back rotating base unit 3570 is rotatable. The rear end of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510 is mounted on the front surface of the movable base 3611 through the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the upper rear rotating base 3571. Accordingly, the movable unit 3610 rotatably mounts the upper back rotation base unit 3570 around an axis extending back and forth about the shaft cylinder 3611a (first hole 3571a) in a state in which the base unit cannot be moved forward. be able to.

  In a state where the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is in mesh with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the upper back rotation base unit 3570. Therefore, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by the driving of the back rotation drive motor 3612, the back rotation base unit 3570 is rotated about the shaft cylinder portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). Can be done. The movable unit 3610 can rotate the upper back rotation base unit 3570 by 90 degrees between a horizontally extended horizontal position and a vertically extended vertical position. The rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the upper rotation base unit 3570 when the upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. .

  In the assembled state, the movable unit 3610 can be moved only vertically with respect to the fixed unit 3650 by the pair of elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 in the assembled state. ing. In the movable unit 3610, an elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 in the fixed unit 3650 is inserted into the elevating slit 3611c of the movable base 3611 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the vertical position of the movable unit 3610 is regulated by the height position of the lifting drive pin 3652b on the lifting rotary body 3652. The movable unit 3610 is urged by a pair of elevating springs 3657 to move upward.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the back ascent / descent unit 3600 has an ascending / descending drive pin 3652b revolving by the rotation of the ascending / descending rotator 3652, immediately above the rotation center of the ascending / descending rotator 3652. On the other hand, it is located slightly to the right, and the movable unit 3610 is in the state of the ascending position where the movable unit 3610 is located at the uppermost position by the elevating drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652c of the rotating rotator 3652 is detected by the lifting sensor 3655. In this state, the lifting drive pin 3652b is in contact with the right end of the lifting slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  Therefore, when the weight of the movable unit 3610 acts on the lifting drive pin 3652b, the lifting drive pin 3652b is rotated by the lifting drive pin 3652b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c, the elevating rotary body 3652 cannot rotate further clockwise in front view, and the movable unit 3610 is prevented from moving downward. ing. That is, the movable unit 3610 is locked at the raised position. Accordingly, the weight (load) from the movable unit 3610 does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3654 via the up / down gear portion 3652a of the up-and-down rotating body 3652 and the up / down drive gear 3653. A load is not applied to the lifting drive motor 3654.

  When the elevating rotary body 3652 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back elevating drive motor 3654 from the state of the elevating position, the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotary body 3652 moves to the left. The orbit moves so as to move downward, and the movable unit 3610 receives the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657 through the elevating slit 3611c while the elevating drive pin 3652b slides to the left in the elevating slit 3611c. It will move downward in opposition. The elevating drive pin 3652b, which revolves when the elevating rotary body 3652 rotates counterclockwise, revolves downward beyond the same height as the rotation center of the elevating rotary body 3652, the horizontal direction of the elevating drive pin 3652b. Is changed, and moves downward while moving rightward, and slides rightward in the elevating slit 3611c.

  When the lifting drive pin 3652b is located immediately below the center of the rotating rotator 3652, the rotation of the rotating rotator 3652 is stopped, and simultaneously, the downward movement of the movable unit 3610 is stopped. Is in the lowered position where it has descended most (see FIG. 158 (b)). When the movable unit 3610 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the back-up / down drive motor 3654 is driven in the opposite direction to rotate the up-and-down rotating body 3652 clockwise in front view. Thus, it is possible to return to the ascending position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable unit 3610 is assisted by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657, and the load on the back elevation drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  In this way, the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 includes the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, and the upper back rotation via the movable side unit 3610. The base unit 3570 can be moved up and down (elevated) between a raised position and a lowered position.

[5-9f-6. Operation of a movable production unit on the back]
Next, the operation of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. FIG. 159 is an explanatory view showing a drive system for elevating when the movable unit of the back elevating / lowering unit is in the ascending position in the back upper movable staging unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system for elevating when the side unit is at a lowered position. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the action position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the horizontal position in the back upper movable effect unit. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operating lever is in a non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotating base unit is in the horizontal position. FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the back upper rotary base unit when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotary base unit is in the horizontal position in the upper back movable effect unit. FIG. 165 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back upper rotary base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotary base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position, and FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the back upper rotary base unit when the movable side unit is at the lowered position and the upper back rotary base unit is at the vertical position.

  FIG. 166 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effecting unit, and FIG. FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation lever restricts rotation in the operation position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the effect unit; When the movable unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotating base unit is in the vertical position, the operating lever acts on the upper back first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit in the operating position. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 159 and the like, the upper back movable rendering unit 3500 is in a state where the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 is at the highest raised position, and the upper back rotating base unit. 3570 is in a horizontal position extending horizontally. In this state, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged on the left and right sides with the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 at the center. In addition, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are provided. 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively formed by the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563. Due to the urging force, they are in the closed position where they are in contact with each other.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 159, the lift drive pin 3652b revolving around the fixed side unit 3650 in the back lift unit 3600 is located slightly to the right of the rotation center of the lift rotating body 3652. Thus, the movable base 3611 is in contact with a right end in a vertically extending slit 3611c extending left and right. Thereby, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper Even if the weight (load) of the rotation base unit 3570 and the movable unit 3610 acts, the lifting drive pin 3652b cannot revolve further clockwise in front view, and moves downward under the movable unit 3610. Is restricted and locked at the raised position.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the loads of the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the upper back rotating base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 are reduced. , Does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3654, so that no load is applied to the back-up / down drive motor 3654. In the normal state, the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 for revolving the elevating drive pin 3652b is detected by the elevating sensor 3655.

  From this normal state, when the back up / down drive motor 3654 is driven to revolve the up / down drive pin 3652b of the up / down rotating body 3652 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the up / down drive pin 3652b moves in the up / down slit 3611c. When the lifting / lowering drive pin 3652b descends, the movable unit 3610 moves downward. When the vertical drive pin 3652b reaches the lowest position, the revolution of the vertical drive pin 3652b stops. As a result, the movable unit 3610 is located at the lowered position (see FIG. 160).

  By moving the movable side unit 3610 of the back up / down unit 3600 to the lowered position, the back upper movable rendering unit 3500 can be configured as a back upper first decorative body unit 3510, a back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and a back upper third decoration. The body unit 3550 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be located at the upper portion on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 174).

  When moving the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 between the raised position and the lowered position, the back upper movable production unit 3500 moves the operation lever 3586 of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 to the operation position. I have. When the operating lever 3586 is moved to the left operating position by the driving of the operating lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. 161, the lock piece 3586d of the operating lever 3586 is moved to the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. Is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the above. As a result, the operating lever 3586 cannot rotate around the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the upper back rotation base unit 3570 to which the operating lever 3586 is mounted is moved to the first mounting shaft member 3525 (movable side). The rotation is locked with respect to the shaft cylinder portion 3611a) of the unit 3610. That is, the rotation of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the horizontal position.

  The lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 has a tapered tip, so that even if the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is slightly displaced with respect to the horizontal position, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 can be used. By inserting the back upper rotation base unit 3570 into the horizontal position by inserting it into the 3525a, the rotation can be locked.

  In the action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extension 3586g of the action lever 3586 comes into contact with the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 from above. At the same time, the third extension 3586j (the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with a predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 from the right. Thus, the rotation of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 about the axis centered on the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotating base 3571 and the upper back rotation of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 by the action lever 3586. The rotation of the base 3571 around the axis about the third hole 3571c is prevented. Therefore, by moving (moving up and down) the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 in the up-down direction, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 are moved. Even when the vibration is applied, the rear upper second decorative body unit 3530, the rear upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the rear upper rotating base unit 3570 are not shaken by the operation of the operation lever 3586 located at the operation position. ing.

  Via the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570, When the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in front view by the operating lever drive motor 3584 through the operating lever drive gear 3584 in the state of being located at the lowered position, the operating lever pinion gear 3585 meshes with the operating lever pinion gear 3585. The operation lever 3586a in the horizontal state is moved to the right non-operation position by the operation lever rack gear 3586a, and the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 162). Thereby, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the upper back rotation base 3571, the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable base 3611). Will be able to

  In the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 163, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610, The third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the center link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  Then, with the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the operation lever 3586 in the non-operation position, the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 is driven to view the rotation base drive gear 3614 in front view. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is connected to the center link gear 3611b (the first hole 3571a, the mounting cylinder) via the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshing with the rotation base drive gear 3614. It rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front about the axis of the portion 3571d) (see FIG. 164). At this time, since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, the back upper rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611b, the second upper third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3577 meshed with the center link gear 3611b. The link gear 3582 rotates while revolving around the center link gear 3611b, and rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the rear upper rotation base 3571, respectively. When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b, and the second drive The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the upper back rotating base 3571, respectively. That is, when the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise in front view, the second upper and lower holes 3571b and 3571c at both longitudinal ends of the upper back rotating base 3571 are rotatably mounted. Drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578 revolve clockwise around first hole 3571a, and second drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578. Rotates (self-rotates) in the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c of the back upper rotating base 3571 in the counterclockwise direction, respectively.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610. The rotation angle between the upper back rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611b is the same as the rotation angle between the upper back rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated about the center link gear 3611b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 maintain the rotation direction thereof constant while maintaining the rotation direction thereof constant. Revolve around 3611b (see FIGS. 164 and 165). In addition, since the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, respectively, When the back-upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-upper third decorative body unit 3550 hold the upper-back first decorative body unit 3510 in a state in which the vertical direction is kept constant. It will revolve around.

  When the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position, the back upper movable decoration unit 3500 has the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 arranged on the right side of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is disposed on the left side of one decorative body unit 3510, when the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise in front view to the vertical position, The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are placed on the lower upper side and upper side of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, respectively, with their vertical directions kept as they are (FIG. 165). See). Therefore, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from the top. . In this state, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are each in the closed position, and are centered in the left-right center of the game area 5a. It is positioned so as to extend across substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 176).

  In a state where the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 166, the operation lever 3586 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 located at the non-operation position is locked by the lock piece. 3586d faces upward. In this state, when the action lever drive motor 3583 is driven to rotate the action lever pinion gear 3585 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the action lever 3586 is moved upward to move from the non-action position to the action position. The lock piece 3586d of the operation lever 3586 is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 167). Thereby, the rotation of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the vertical position.

  When the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position in a state where the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the rear upper movable effecting unit 3500 moves the operating lever 3586 upward. Each tip (upper end) of the first working portion 3586f, the second working portion 3586i, and the third working portion 3586k of the 3586 is a receiving boss of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. 3521b, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively brought into contact with the lower side to perform the first opening / closing. The arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward.

  Then, when the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 each move upward, the first left movable of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 which has been in the closed position. The decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the third left of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 The movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be away from each other, and are in an open position (see FIG. 168).

Thus, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530. The second fixed decorative lenses 3533 facing from between the lens 3532 are aligned in a straight line from top to bottom.
In this state, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are each in the open position, and are centered in the left-right center of the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are positioned so as to extend longitudinally over substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500. They are arranged vertically with substantially the same width so as to be continuous with the rear front lower central lens 3131 (see FIG. 177).

  In addition, in order to return the back upper movable effect unit 3500 to the normal state, it is possible to return to the normal state by performing the operation reverse to the above.

  In addition, the back upper movable rendering unit 3500 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510, and a second left movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit 3530. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are in the closed position where they are in contact with each other, respectively. Can show the decoration of different characters, and from left to right, when the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged side by side, three One character is in a state where a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written horizontally, and the player is made to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible. Note that when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged from top to bottom. The logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written vertically, and the player can recognize the logo even in this state.

  As described above, according to the back upper movable rendering unit 3500, the relative positions of the upper back rotating base unit 3570 with respect to the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back side by the operating lever 3586 that moves between the operating position and the non-operating position according to a specific rotation position (horizontal position or vertical position). The different effects of the rotation lock (first action) and the movement to the open position (second action) can be exerted on the upper third decorative body unit 3550 so that different effects can be shown to the player. Can be made hard to get tired of, and a player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

[5-9 g. Movable production unit under the back]
Next, the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 (a) is a front view of the underside movable production unit of the back unit, FIG. 169 (b) is a rear view of the underside movable production unit, and FIG. It is a rear view which shows the state which raised the unit. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 includes a lower back movable decorative unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration, and a back mounted in the back box 3010 to move the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 up and down. A lower drive unit 3750.

  The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is formed with a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged left and right under a roof extending left and right, and a part of each gate penetrates back and forth. A main body 3711, a plurality of lower back door members 3712, which are attached to each gate portion of the lower back decoration body 3711 in such a manner as to open and close in a double-door manner in a pair, and a lower back door member 3712. A lower back decorative body base 3713 attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body main body 3711 behind and extending left and right, and is slidably mounted in the left and right direction at a lower front part of the lower back decorative body base 3713. A lower opening / closing slider 3714 for hinge-rotating the lower back door member 3712 on the left side in a front view of a pair of the plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a left-right direction on an upper front surface of the lower back decoration base 3713. Slidably the back under the door member 3712 viewed from the front right side in mounted and are pairwise multiple subplantar door member 3712 comprises a, opening and closing the slider 3715 on which the hinge rotates.

  In addition, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body base 3713. One end is attached to the upper end of the body 3716 and the opening / closing rotating body 3716 and the other end is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713. And a door closing spring 3717 for urging the opening / closing rotary member 3716 so that the hinge 3712 rotates in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 urges the opening / closing rotator 3716 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in rear view.

  Further, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is arranged on the rear side of the lower back decorative lens 3718 (see FIG. 179) attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body main body 3712. A lower back decorative board 3719 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a wiring cable 3701 attached to the back side of the lower back decorative body base 3713 and connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775. And an upper wiring cover 3720 that can guide the The distribution cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713 to form a downwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in a rear view.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, penetrates back and forth to the upper left corner in front view, extends right and left, and shortens upward from the right end. A lower back drive base 3751 having a link slit 3751a extending therefrom, and a back surface mounted movably up and down on the front surface of the back lower drive base 3751 and having a lower back decoration unit 3710 mounted on the upper portion. A lower elevating base 3752, a pair of elevating arms 3753 rotatably mounted near the left and right ends on the front surface of the lower back driving base 3751 to move the lower elevating base 3752 up and down, and The lower back drive motor 3754 attached to the side and the pair of up and down A plurality of transmission gears 3755 to rotate the over arm 3753 directions different from each other, and a.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 has a lower end slidably mounted in a link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751 and an upper end rotatably mounted on the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back decoration unit 3710. Provided is a bar-shaped link arm 3756. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 at a position on the right side as viewed from the rear with respect to the center of rotation. Thus, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates clockwise in rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717.

  Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751, and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back drive motor 3754 to the lower right relay board 3034. A board 3577 and a lower part which is attached above the lower back relay board 3775 on the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 and which can guide a wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back relay board 3775 and the lower back decorative board 3719. A wiring cover 3758. The lower wiring cover 3758 forms an upwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701 by being attached to the lower rear drive base 3751. Further, the lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guiding portion 3758a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in a rear view.

  Subsequently, an operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the lower back movable effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 169 (a) and (b)). In this state, a plurality of lower back door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotator 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714, and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 by the urging force of the door closing spring 3717, and the back lower decorative body main body is closed. The doors of the plurality of gates 3711 (lower back door member 3712) are in a closed state. Further, in this state, it is located below the upper end of a portion forming the lower side of the frame-shaped center role 2500, and is hardly seen from the front (see FIG. 114 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the bottom drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of lifting arms 3753 so that the sides facing each other move upward, the bottom bottom lifting base 3752 moves upward, and the bottom bottom The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 attached to the lifting base 3752 rises.

  At this time, since the upper end of the link arm 3756 is attached to the rotating body 3716 for opening and closing of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, the upper end of the link arm 3756 rises together with the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, and the lower end side is the lower back. The inside of the link slit 3751a of the drive base 3751 slides upward (to the left in rear view).

  Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 rises and the lower end of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a, the link arm 3756 cannot move upward any more. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the vertical movement of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 at this position (first rising position). In this state, the portions of the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration body 3711 are positioned above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center role 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center role 2500. A plurality of gates in the state can be seen (see FIG. 178).

  When the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 further rises in the first raising / lowering position, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a. The rotating body 3716 for opening and closing, to which the upper end of the arm 3752 is attached, rotates clockwise in rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 169 (c)). When the opening / closing rotator 3716 rotates clockwise in rear view, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in a direction to open the plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a plurality of the lower lower decoration body 3711 The door of the gate (lower back door member 3712) is in an open state and the ascent is stopped. In the state where the lower back door member 3712 is in the opened position (second ascent position), the lower lower decorative lens 3718 disposed on the rear side through the plurality of gates of the lower lower decorative body main body 3711 becomes visible (FIG. 179). See). In this state, the LED on the lower back decoration board 3719 emits light, so that the open gate can be made to emit light.

  The lower back movable effect unit 3700 includes a wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 of the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 and the lower back relay board 3775 of the lower back drive unit 3750 to the upper wiring cover 3720. And the lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 has an upper guiding portion 3720a in which a portion between the upper side and the right side in rear view is curved and a lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guiding portion 3758a in which a portion between the lower side and the right side in rear view is curved and an upper end of the right side extends upward.

  The wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 is configured to extend rightward in rear view at the left end in rear view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 side. On the lower back drive unit 3750 side, it is mounted so as to extend rightward in rear view at the left end in rear view on the lower side of the lower wiring cover. Thus, in the state where the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is at the normal position where it is most lowered, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extends along the upper guide portion 3720a and the lower guide portion 3758a, and is not extremely bent. The lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 are connected well (see FIG. 169 (b)).

On the other hand, in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is raised, as shown in FIG. The lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 are connected to each other while being separated from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side (lower guide part 3758a) in rear view. Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 descends from the raised state, it is guided by the upper guide section 3720a and the lower guide section 3758a, respectively, so that it is smoothly bent without being bent, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower It will be accommodated in the wiring cover 3758.
Therefore, even if the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is repeatedly moved up and down, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 and the lower back drive unit 3750 is repeatedly moved up and down. Bending can be prevented, and disconnection of the distribution cable 3701 can be prevented.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 179. FIG. 170 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. FIG. 171 shows that the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position closer to the center, and each first decoration surface is directed forward. 172 is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state, and FIG. 172 rotates the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit from the state of FIG. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board showing the front facing state, and FIG. 173 rotates the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state with the 3rd decoration surface turned to the front.

  FIG. 174 shows the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit and the second left movable decorative lens and the second movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit in the rear upper movable effect unit in the rear unit. The second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are each in the closed position, and then the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit is moved to the lowered position while keeping the back upper rotating base unit in the horizontal position so that the third upper decorative body unit is horizontally arranged, FIG. 175 shows the back upper first decorative unit, the back upper second decorative unit, and the back upper third decorative unit by rotating the back upper rotating base unit 45 degrees clockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 174. Are lined up diagonally FIG. 176 is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state, and FIG. 176 shows that the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated clockwise in the front view by 45 degrees from the state of FIG. FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board in which the unit, the back upper second decorative body unit, and the back upper third decorative body unit are vertically arranged, and FIG. 177 shows the back upper first decorative body unit from the state of FIG. 176. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative of the back upper third decorative body unit A front view of the game board showing the lens and the third right movable decorative lens in an open position, respectively, with the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens visible. is there.

  FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board in which the lower back movable decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascending position. FIG. 179 is the lower back movable decoration from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the body unit was further raised and moved to the second raising position.

  In the normal state, the game board 5 is, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 121 and the like, a display screen of a game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center role 2500. Can be visually recognized from the player side (front). In the back middle movable effecting unit 3200, the left and right back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are located at the evacuation positions most separated from each other, which are behind the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 at the evacuation positions. In this state, a part of the back center left decorative body 3210 and a part of the back center right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center role 2500. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position where it has moved to the leftmost position, and is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100 and almost from the front. can not see. In the back right movable rendering unit 3400, the back right decorative body 3410 is in a retracted position where it has moved to the rightmost side, and a part of the right side of the center role 2500 is seen through the frame of the center role 2500. I have.

  In the normal state, the movable upper unit 3610 of the rear elevating / lowering unit 3600 is in the ascending position where the movable unit 3610 is at the highest position, and the rear upper rotating base unit 3570 extends horizontally in the upper rear movable staging unit 3500. It is in the horizontal position. Also, with the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 at the center, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. Then, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are provided. 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively formed by the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563. Each of them is in a closed position in which they are in contact with each other by the urging force, and each forms a decoration of a predetermined character. The back upper movable rendering unit 3500 is configured such that the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in a row from left to right. A predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be horizontally displayed by the two characters, and the predetermined logo is displayed above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the frame of the center role 2500. It is visible from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 is a back decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back upper movable production unit 3500, and lower back movable production unit 3700 perform predetermined production (movable production and light emission production). Do.

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back middle movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decoration which are separated from each other by driving the back middle drive motor 3254 are separated. The body 3220 is moved so as to approach each other, and is moved to a substantially central appearance position (see FIG. 170). As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in a state of being located substantially at the center of the front side of the game board effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body The decoration with 3220 is combined. In the state of this appearance position, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 block the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and strongly attract the interest of the player. In addition to being able to let them combine, one large decoration (decoration imitating the petals of cherry blossoms) is formed, so that the player thinks that there is something good and hopes for the game Can be raised.

  As an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450 By driving the movement drive motor 3452, the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 are moved to the appearance position on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are in a state close to the center close to the left side and the right side in the frame-shaped center role 2500. In other words, it is located near the left and right ends on the front of the game board effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  Thereby, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 become visible, which can surprise the player, and attracts the player's interest to the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410. Can be done. At this time, the LEDs on the back left decorative board 3334 and the back right decorative board 3434 emit light, so that the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be made to emit light, thereby further attracting the player's interest. Can be done. Further, in this state, the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen from between the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410, so that the effect in collaboration with the effect image can be enjoyed.

  Then, in a state where the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are moved to the appearance position, the back left rotary drive motor and the back right rotary drive motor (not shown) of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 and the back right rotary drive unit 3430. Thereby, the player can be entertained by rotating the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 around the axis extending vertically. When stopping the rotating back left decorative body 3310 and back right decorative body 3410, the first decorative surfaces 3311 and 3411 of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are stopped so as to face forward ( 171), the second decorative surfaces 3312, 3412 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 172), and the third decorative surfaces 3313, 3413 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 173). )can do. Since the decoration changes depending on the direction in which the rotation of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 is stopped, the player can enjoy the changing decoration, and the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative with a desired decoration. Depending on whether or not the body 3410 stops, the body 3410 can be excited and excited, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the back left movable rendering unit 3300 and the back right movable rendering unit 3400 can be independently moved, only one of them may be movable, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surface facing forward may be different. Thereby, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of.

  As an effect using the back upper movable effecting unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, in a normal position state, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is set to the horizontal position, and the operating lever 3586 is set to the operating position. When the elevating drive pin 3652b revolves in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the elevating drive motor 3654, the movable unit 3610 moves downward with the revolving of the elevating drive pin 3652b, and is attached to the movable unit 3610. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 that are being moved down. Then, when the elevation drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position and stops revolving, the upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the lower upper The three decorative body units 3550 are located at the lowered position side by side (horizontally) (see FIG. 174).

  In this state, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are positioned upward from the center in the vertical direction in the frame of the center role 2500. Thus, the state is such that the upper half of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered. As a result, a predetermined logo formed by three of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Because it descends to the center side so as to block a part of the displayed effect image, it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and raise the player's expectation of the game. Can be done.

  In the state of FIG. 174, when the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 to move the operating lever 3586 from the operating position to the right non-operating position, the first mounting is performed. The lock piece 3586d inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is released.

  When the rotation of the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the rotation of the upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 in a state where the rotation lock of the upper rotation base unit 3570 by the action lever 3586 is released. Via the rotating base driven gear 3572 meshing with the base driving gear 3614, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 rotates clockwise in front view around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, the back upper rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the center link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3572 meshing with the center link gear 3611b are moved to the center link gear. 3611b, while revolving around itself, the rotation thereof is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear The members 3578 rotate in counterclockwise directions with respect to the upper back rotation base 3571, respectively. Therefore, when the back-upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-upper third decorative body unit 3550 keep the up-down direction constant, and the back-upper first decorative body unit is kept. Revolve around body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 175 and 176).

  Due to the rotation of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, when the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 revolve around the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is rotated. Since the vertical direction of the decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is maintained, a predetermined logo with three decorative characters can be sufficiently recognized by the player. You can enjoy the movement that the logo changes to a vertical logo.

  When the upper back rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position in a front view, it reaches the vertical position and stops its rotation. In this state, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from top to bottom (see FIG. 176). As a result, the logo formed by the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is positioned at the center of the center role 2500 within the frame. Since it seems to be vertical across almost the entire height of the inside, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to enhance the interest of the player.

  Then, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are vertically arranged. In this state, when the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 to move the operating lever 3586 in the non-operating position upward and to the operating position, the operating lever 3586 is actuated. Is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is in a state of being rotationally locked at the vertical position.

  When the operating lever 3586 moves (raises) from the non-operating position to the operating position, the respective distal ends of the first operating portion 3586f, the second operating portion 3586i, and the third operating portion 3586k of the operating lever 3586. The upper end is the receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body. The lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the unit 3550 is abutted from below, and the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are respectively moved upward. Accordingly, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the second left movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the closed position are in the closed position. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other. To the open position (see FIG. 177).

  Thereby, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and the first left movable decorative so as to vertically cross the left and right center in the game area 5a. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and a second fixed decorative lens facing from between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. The 3533 and the lower front center lens 3131 of the back decoration unit 3100 are aligned in a straight line from top to bottom, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the interest of the player. Can be done.

  Then, in this state, the LEDs mounted on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the upper back second decorative substrate 3534, and the lower front lower decorative substrate 3134 emit light as appropriate. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower central lens 3131 are sequentially illuminated and decorated to guide the player's line of sight upward or downward. Can entertain the player. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131 are formed to have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the lower back front center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 allow the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the left and right direction. (See FIG. 181).

  As an effect using the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, for example, when the lower back drive decorative motor unit 3754 moves the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 to the first elevating position from a normal state, the lower back decorative body The main body 3711 is positioned above the stage 2530 in the center role 2500, and can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500. This allows the lower back decoration main body 3711 to be visible, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest (see FIG. 178). In the state of the first elevating position, the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration body 3711 are closed by the plurality of lower back door members 3712.

  Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 slightly rises from the first raising / lowering position to the second raising / lowering position, the plurality of lower back door members 3712 rotate by hinges and the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative body 3711 are opened. (See FIG. 179). By performing the opening operation of the gate (lower back door member 3712), the player can be made to think that something is good, and the expectation for the game can be increased. In this state, when the LED of the lower back decoration board 3719 emits light to illuminate the open gate, the player can be convinced that a chance has come, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced. Can be.

  As described above, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back right movable production unit 3400, the back upper movable production unit 3500, and the back bottom Lighting effects, movable effects, display effects, and the like can be performed by using the movable effect units 3700 and the like as appropriate, and various effects can entertain the player, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different Embodiment in Gaming Board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 shows another embodiment of the game board, in which the movable effect unit on the back of the back unit is provided with an LED for emitting and decorating the center lens stage and the lower center lens on the back of the back decoration unit. FIG. In the embodiment of FIG. 180, a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of irradiating light downward are provided on the second upper decorative board 3534 of the second upper decorative body unit 3530 in the second movable effect unit 3500. is there.

  Thus, by rotating the back upper rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is positioned at the center of the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) or the back front decoration. The upper end of the lower front center lens 3131 of the unit 3100 is in close proximity to the upper end, and the lower LED 3534a emits light in this state, so that the center of the stage 2530 and the upper portion of the lower front center lens 3131 can be light-embellished. . Therefore, even in a region where the decorative board provided with the LED cannot be arranged at the rear, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to perform the light emitting decoration, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. A luminous effect can be performed.

[5-12. Direction by door frame and game board]
Next, an effect using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.
FIG. 181 shows a rear upper movable effect unit in the rear unit of the game board, in which the upper rear rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and a first left movable decorative lens and a first right movable of the rear upper first decorative body unit. A decorative lens, a second left movable decorative lens and a second right movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit, and a third left movable decorative lens and a third right movable decorative lens of the third upper decorative body unit respectively It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows each 1st fixed decorative lens, 2nd fixed decorative lens, and 3rd fixed decorative lens in the state of an open position so that it could be visually recognized.

  As an effect by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there is an effect using an effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 and a movable effect unit 3500 on the back of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back-side movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, with the movable-side unit 3610 of the back-up / down unit 3600 moved to the lowered position, the back-up rotary base unit 3570 is moved to the vertical position. , And moves the operation lever 3586 from the non-operation position to the operation position, so that the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, and the upper back second decorative body unit The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are in the open position, respectively.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 181, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back surface formed at substantially the same width in the left-right center of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are arranged side by side from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. Then, in this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decoration are formed by the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the upper back second decorative substrate 3534, and the lower front lower decorative substrate 3134. The lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front center lens 3131 are sequentially illuminated and decorated from the top, so that the player's line of sight can be displayed on the door frame 3 on the door frame side of the rendering operation unit 400. Can be enjoyed, and the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 can be enjoyed, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated to surely enjoy the player participation type effect. I can do it.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven harder as the clockwise rotation is performed. , Game balls can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is placed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper portion of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view from the highest portion, it contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward. When the game ball enters the chance entrance 2535 at the center of the stage 2530 and is released from the chance exit 2536 into the game area 5a, the chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the probability is high. The first start port 2002 is received. When game balls are received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from a position other than the center into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2400, and the opening in the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that the state will be accepted in the first grand prize entrance 2005 or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side slope 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, , Starting port 2002 of starting port unit 2100, etc. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center role 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Immediately below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate passage 2420 provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and a game ball enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability. I do.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the second lottery is performed. The second starting port door 2411 that closes the starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), so that game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004. When game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal fluctuation time is, the more the game balls for which the “normal hit” is drawn in the gate unit 2003 can be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  Note that if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit”, “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, special lottery results that are determined by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R jackpot "," probable change (probability change) "," time saving (time reduction) "," probable change time saving "," probable change time saving no hit "," second big hit (for example, per character) ", etc. is there.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the first special winning opening 2005 is ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the payout devices 830 is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. ) Are paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to accept game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out and entertaining the player. Can be.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the first winning port 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Then, the opening and closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first big winning prize. When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the mouth 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern in which the game balls cannot be received in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result is “second big hit (for example, per hit)”, the second big winning opening 2006 is a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 3.0 seconds), Alternatively, the open state is established until one of the conditions of receiving a predetermined number (for example, only one) of game balls is satisfied. When a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006 when the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. Then, when the game balls received in the second special winning opening 2006 are distributed to the first receiving opening 2431 by the sorting piece 2433, the first special winning opening 2005 opens and closes as a “5R big hit”, and the sorting piece 2433. Is distributed to the second reception port 2432, the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes as "15R big hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is limited to a maximum of four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is indicated as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is a display in which three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is fluctuated and displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a fixed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, or the like) according to the selected special lottery result occurs.

  Note that a time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and a time indicating the special lottery result in the game board effect display device 1600 (the symbol row is changed). (The time until the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected. Operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460, the back decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500 It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3700, and the underside movable effect unit 3700, and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a door frame. Hereinafter, similarly, the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the present embodiment is a window portion, and the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A in the present embodiment are operation receiving portions, The door frame side effect display device 460 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the present embodiment are door frame side light emitting decorations, and further, the lower front lower back of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000 of the present embodiment. The center lens 3131 is a light emitting decoration part on the game board side.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510 in the upper movable effect unit 3500 of the lower unit 3000 of the rear unit 3000, and the second decorative body unit 3530 in the upper rear. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are opening / closing decorative portions, In this embodiment, the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens. The lens 3552 is an opening / closing decorative section divided body.

  In addition, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the present embodiment are a movable light emitting decorative part and a light emitting decorative part divided body, and the back upper rotating base unit in the present embodiment. The 3570 and the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 are decoration part moving means, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 in the present embodiment is a moving base body, and the action lever 3586 in the present embodiment is a working body. The movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 in the back elevation unit 3600 in the form is an appearance base.

Further, in the present embodiment, the horizontal position and the vertical position of the upper back rotating base unit 3570 are a first moving position and a second moving position, and in the present embodiment, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. By moving the operation lever 3586 to the operation position by using, the operation of locking the rotation of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is the first operation.
In the present embodiment, the operation of moving the operation lever 3586 to the operation position in a state where the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position locks the rotation of the upper back rotation base unit 3570, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511. And the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move from the closed position to the open position. The action to be performed is the second action.

  Further, in the back up / down unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the up position and the down position of the movable unit 3610 are the retracted position and the appearance position, and the position of the back up movable effect unit 3500 in the normal state is the first position in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the position where the movable unit 3610 is in the lowered position and the upper-side rotating base unit is in the vertical position is the second effect position.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved to the positions in the normal state (the first effect). Position), the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are arranged side by side near the upper edge of the front-view game area 5a. , A first fixed decorative lens 3513, a second fixed decorative lens 3533, and a third fixed decorative lens 3553 are provided so as to correspond to the first fixed decorative lens 3511 and the first fixed movable lens 3512, respectively. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3 As a result, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 are in a closed position near the upper edge of the game area 5a in front view, respectively. Only the decorations of the movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the decoration of the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are visible.
In this state, the upper back rotating base unit 3570, in which the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are arranged in a row on the front surface, extends horizontally (first position). (Moving position), and the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 to which the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is attached to the front surface is located at the upper rising position (retreat position).
The operating lever 3586 attached to the back-upside rotation base unit 3570 has a pair of a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens at any of the non-operating position and the operating position. 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, and the operating lever 3586 is operated. When moved to the position, the relative movement (rotation) between the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 and the upper back rotating base unit 3570 can be regulated.

When the movable unit 3610 is moved from the normal state to the lower position (appearance position) below, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens together with the upper back rotating base unit 3570. Since the lens 3553 moves downward and approaches the center in the up-down direction in the gaming machine area 5a when viewed from the front, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 ( (First left movable decorative lens 3511 and first right movable decorative lens 3512, second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right movable decorative lens 3532, and third left movable decorative lens 3551 and third right movable decorative lens 3552) , The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right Dynamic decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532, and it is possible to entertain the decoration of the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552.
By moving the operation lever 3586 to the operation position when moving the movable side unit 3610 to the lowering position (appearance position), the second upper decoration unit 3530 and the upper third decoration body on the back side by the first operation. Since the relative movement between the unit 3550 and the upper back rotation base unit 3570 can be restricted, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, In addition, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the upper back rotation base unit 3570 do not relatively move (shake), and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 ( First left movable decorative lens 3511 and first right movable decorative lens 3512, second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right movable decorative lens 3 32, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552).

In a state where the movable side unit 3610 is moved to the lowered position (appearance position), the first upper decorative unit 3510, the second upper decorative unit 3530, the third upper decorative unit 3550, and the upper rotating base are placed. Since the space around the unit 3570 can be easily secured, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the movable unit 3610.
Therefore, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 can be rotated from the horizontally extended horizontal position (first movement position) to the vertically extended vertical position (second movement position).
At this time, by moving the operating lever 3586 to the non-operating position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 and the upper back rotation are rotated. Since the regulation of the relative movement (rotation) with respect to the base unit 3570 is released, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, And the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is relatively rotatable around the axis extending forward and backward, respectively, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 regardless of the rotational position of the back upper rotating base unit 3570. , And a third fixed decorative lens 3553 (first left movable decorative lens 3511, first right movable decorative lens 3512, second left movable decorative lens 3531 Beauty second right movable decorative lens 3532, and may be a third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552) is moved to each of the upper and lower orientation constant.

With the movable unit 3610 moved to the lowered position (appearance position), the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated about an axis extending back and forth from the horizontal position (first movement position) to the vertical position (second movement). Position), the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved to the center in the left-right direction of the front-viewing game area 5a while keeping the vertical direction constant. Thus, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be moved to the second effect position.
In this state, since the operating lever 3586 is in the non-operating position, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved from the closed position to the first left movable decorative lens. 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are invisible and invisible respectively. Therefore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 above the lower front lower central lens 3131 of the lower front decorative unit 3100 in the front view game area 5a. And the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 552 is a state lined up and down in a closed state.
The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. The first left movable decorative lens, which is closed to the player, is poorly integrated with the lower back front lower central lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3. 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the left and right center of the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 (second It is possible to make it easy to pay attention only to the movement to the production position).
Accordingly, the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, and the second right which are arranged side by side in the left-right closed state near the upper edge of the front-view game area 5a. The movable decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are arranged vertically above and below the center in the left-right direction so as to be continuous above the lower front center lens 3131, and are closed respectively. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens Since the direction in which the 3552s are arranged changes, the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3512 are changed. The first and second right movable decorative lenses 3532, and the third left and right movable decorative lenses 3551 and 3552 move differently from each other so that the first left movable lens is closed to the player. Enjoy the movable effects of the decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game, and to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the player's expectation of the game. Can be.

After moving the movable side unit 3610 to the lowering position (appearance position), the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is moved to the vertical position (second movement position), and in this state, the operation lever 3586 is moved to the operation position. With the second action, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third The right movable decorative lens 3552 moves to the open position so as to be separated from each other, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are provided. , And from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552, respectively, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, The second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 and the second fixed decorative lens 312 above the lower front lower central lens 3131 at the center in the left-right direction of the front-view game area 5a. 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are vertically arranged so as to be continuous with each other.
Therefore, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are vertically aligned at the center in the left-right direction in front view. , The player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player's expectation of the game can be further increased.

  Then, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 in front view. When they are illuminated in a state in which they are lined up and down in a straight line, a luminous effect of luminous decoration is performed in such a manner as to vertically cross over the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (game area 5a) at the center of the front of the pachinko machine 1. Can give a strong impact to the player, and can be convinced that there is absolutely something good beyond the expectations of the past. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved to the second production position by the back upper rotating base unit 3570 and the back elevating / lowering unit 3600, and the first fixed decorative lens is moved. The lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are vertically aligned, and each is illuminated. Thus, since the line of sight (interest) of the player can be guided to the door frame side effect display device 460, the operation of the operation button 410 that covers the door frame side effect display device 460 so as to be visible to the player can be performed. It is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player-participation-type effect in which the operation button 410 is operated. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 have substantially the same left and right widths. Therefore, when the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved to the second rendering position and emit light, respectively, the center in the left-right direction of the front-view pachinko machine 1 is longitudinally cut. Since one band of light can be shown, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and one band of light is conspicuous even when the player is away from the pachinko machine 1, so that other players can be seen. Can be easily noticed, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided. Rukoto can.

  Furthermore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third movable decorative lens 3512 are respectively closed. When the right movable decorative lens 3552 is in the first production position, it is arranged side by side, so that the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right When the movable decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are moved between the first rendering position and the second rendering position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first Right movable decorative lens 3512, second left movable decorative lens 3531, second right movable decorative lens 3532, and third left movable decorative lens 3551 And the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are moved so as to rotate around the axes extending forward and backward, respectively, so that the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens The movement of the 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the movement of the third left and the right movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 become more conspicuous, and the interest of the player becomes the first left and the right movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right. The movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be strongly attracted to the player. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right The moving decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be entertained by giving an impression as if they are moving dynamically, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player. Let

  Further, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third movable decorative lens 3512 are respectively closed. Even if the right movable decorative lens 3552 is moved between the first production position and the second production position, their vertical directions do not change, so that each first left movable decorative lens 3511 and first right movable A logo is employed for decoration formed by closing the decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Therefore, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens can be provided to the player. The zoom lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552, respectively, make the decoration formed by closing each more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

Further, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the By moving the three right movable decorative lenses 3552 away from each other, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and Since the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be visually recognized through the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552, respectively, Left movable decorative lens 3511 and first right movable decorative lens 3512, second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right The moving decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 open can give a sense of tension to the player, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 A first fixed decoration that can be visually recognized from between the right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Attention can be paid to the lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553.
Then, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 that can be visually recognized emit light together with the lower front center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460, It is possible to enjoy the luminous performance of a single light band extending so as to extend through the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction, and to increase the expectation for the game by assuming that there may be something good. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the movable unit 3610 (the movable base 3611) of the back up / down unit 3600 in the back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is moved to the game area 5a. The upper-side rotating base unit 3570 rotatably attached to the movable-side base 3611 is positioned at a horizontal position while the upper-side rotating base unit 3570 rotatably attached to the movable-side base 3611 is positioned at an upper position away from the center in front view. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 provided on the front surface are visible in a state where they are arranged in the left-right direction. . At this time, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 each have a pair as a set, each of which has a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a second movable decorative lens 3511. The one right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are respectively a first opening / closing spring 3523, Since it is located in the closed position by the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543 and the third opening / closing spring 3563, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 of the 3550 are the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are hidden invisibly respectively. It has become.
Therefore, in each of the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable in the closed position state. Only the decoration of a predetermined logo with characters formed by the decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 is performed. It can entertain players.

  Then, when the movable unit 3610 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 attached to the movable side unit 3610, the first upper decorative body unit 3510, the second upper decorative body Since the unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are close to the center of the game area 5a in front view, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back. The third decorative body unit 3550 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550. be able to.

  When the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is in the raised position or moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the upper operating position along the back upper rotating base 3571 in the upper back rotating base unit 3570. When the first action is applied to the action lever 3586 on each of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, The relative rotation of the decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is regulated (locked), and vibration and inertia force are generated. For example, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 swing. It can be prevented from moving or moving, so that the decorations of the first upper decorative unit 3510, the second upper decorative unit 3530, and the third upper decorative unit 3550 can be enjoyed with good appearance. it can.

  By moving the upper back rotating base unit 3570 to the lower position and moving the operating lever 3586 to the non-operating position, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and is moved from the horizontal position. When rotated to the vertical position, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 maintain the vertical orientation. While rotating relative to the back upper rotation base unit 3570, respectively, it revolves around the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and is arranged in a vertical direction different from the horizontal position. The effect that the direction in which the first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged changes. It is possible to entertain show in person.

  With the back upper rotating base unit 3570 rotated to the vertical position, the operating lever 3586 is moved upward along the back upper rotating base 3571 from the non-operating position to the operating position, and each back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is moved. When a second action is exerted on the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper In the third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 against the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are closed. From the position to the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and Since the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible from between the third right movable decorative lens 3552, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens. By making the third fixed decorative lens 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 visible, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and also to the player, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 And the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3532 The decorative lens 3551 and the third movable decorative lens 3552 are opened to give a premium feeling to the effect in which the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible. It is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game.

  Therefore, depending on the relative rotation position (horizontal position or vertical position) of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550. By the action lever 3586 that moves between the working position and the non-working position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are rotationally locked (second lock). One action) and the movement to the open position (second action) can give different effects to the player, and the various effects can make the player hard to get tired of. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 in the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are changed from the normal state. The right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move to the open position and are fixed to the first position. Until the decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible, there are multiple stages of movement (production), so in each stage, whether or not to proceed to the next stage The player can be thrilled at the back, so that the player can give the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back Third decorative body unit 3550 series of moves by (directed) can entertain, a reduction in the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction to rotate and move between the horizontal position and the vertical position, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper rotary base unit 3570 with respect to the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are changed in direction. The direction of the operating lever 3586 is also different from the one decorative body unit 3510, the second upper decorative body unit 3530, and the third upper decorative body unit 3550, and the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position. In the horizontal position and the vertical position, the upper decorative first unit 3510, the second decorative upper unit 3530, and Direction acting on the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 (direction) becomes different.
Therefore, the first action and the second action act in different directions between the horizontal position and the vertical position, so that the first action and the second action cause the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the back upper second decorative body. Since the action exerted on the unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be easily changed, as described above, the first action of rotating and locking and the second action of moving to the open position act. The mechanism for making the pachinko machine 1 can have a relatively simple configuration, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, since the operation lever 3586 is linearly moved (slid) along the upper back rotation base 3571 of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 between the non-operation position and the operation position, the operation lever 3586 is rotated. Compared with the case of making it work, the distance between the non-working position and the working position can be easily increased, and the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, back upper second decorative body unit 3530, A sufficient effect can be exerted on the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 to facilitate a desired effect.

In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3512 The movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are connected to the first open / close spring 3523, the second open / close spring 3543, and the third open / close spring 3563. , The back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 move or vibrate. Inadvertently, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3511 The decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move to the open position, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. Can be prevented from being visible.
Thereby, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 only when the second action is exerted on the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550. By moving the right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is moved. , The second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible. The production effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 by the movable side unit 3610 can be viewed from the front of the game area 5a. Since it can be moved to the lowering position close to the center, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, and the upper back rotating base unit 3570 are lowered. When moved to the position, the space for rotating the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is easily secured, and the horizontal position and the vertical position Since the range of movement of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 that rotates between the base units can be made larger, the second upper back decoration Surprised player by unit 3530 and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 revolves largely can entertain more, the lowering of interest on the game player's can be suppressed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the upper back movable staging unit 3500, when the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, by moving from the non-operating position to the operating position, the effect exerted by the operating lever 3586 (second operation). ), The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530. Although the lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the third upper decorative body unit 3550 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, they may be moved from the open position to the closed position, or the first decorative body unit 3510, Two decorative body unit 3530, and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 may be or so as to rotate around an axis extending in front and rear.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 include the pachinko machine 1 In the center in the left-right direction, a state in which the pachinko machine 1 (game area 5a) is vertically aligned near the left end or the right end in the left-right direction is shown, but is not limited thereto. The state may be such that they are continuously arranged, or they may be obliquely inclined with respect to the vertical direction and arranged in a straight line.

Regarding the third effect operation unit 400B, the following embodiments can be considered based on the structure already described.
[Example 400B-1]: The rotating decorative body 4003 is not a three-dimensional object such as a sphere, but a disk. For example, a disk attached to be inclined with respect to the axis of rotation can be seen to have its front and back interchanged with rotation when viewed from the front.
[Example 400B-2]: When the direction in which the rotary ornament 4003 rotates is pulled by pulling the tab 4102, the rotary ornament 4003 is rotated in the forward direction even when the tab 4102 is returned to the original position. When the puller 4102 is pulled or returned, the rotary decorative body 4003 is continuously rotated in the forward direction.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 192, a reverse drive gear 4122 is provided coaxially and integrally with a drive wheel 4106 having a one-way rotation clutch 4109, and an idle gear 4123 is always meshed with the reverse drive gear 4122, and a clutch gear 4124 is connected to the idle gear 4123. The gear train in which the shafts of these gears are connected by a link 4125 in a meshed state is arranged by rotatably disposing the clutch gear 4124 side of the link 4125 around the axis of the idle gear 4123 as a rotation axis. A switching clutch mechanism 4126 is provided which enables the clutch gear 4124 to be engaged with and disengaged from the drive gear 4015 on the second drive shaft 4012 side. This allows the link 4125 to be switched to a position where the clutch gear 4124 meshes with the drive gear 4015 when the linear member 4202 is unwound by the spring 4107.

The operation may be automatic, and the link 4125 may be rotated by the player by operating the lever 4127 or the like from outside.
By doing so, there is a surprising effect that not only when the player pulls, but also when the player releases his hand, it is surprising that the rotating decorative body 4003 keeps rotating itself, which is interesting. It is effective in suppressing decline.

In the above configuration (FIG. 192), if the clutch gear 4124 is not provided and the idle gear 4123 is directly brought into contact with or separated from the drive gear 4105, the rotary decorative body 4003 rotates forward when the puller 4102 is pulled, and the puller 4102 When it is returned, it can be rotated in reverse. At this time, the rotation of the rotary decorative body 4003 can be stopped by the pulling degree of the handle 4102, so that the player can arbitrarily control the rotation of the rotary decorative body, thereby increasing the voluntary operational feeling and suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest. It is effective to do.
The operation of the idle gear 4123 (substantially clutch gear) can be manually performed by the player using the lever 4127 or the like, or the change of the linear member 4202 from the pulling movement to the rewinding movement can be performed. You may make it operate automatically by grasping.

[Embodiment 400B-3]: Embodiment 6: In the above-described gaming machine, a peripheral decorative ring 4204 arranged around the rotary decorative body around the round window facing the rotary decorative body 4003 is structured as a round window. It is configured to be independent of the part and to rotate in a mode different from the rotation of the rotary decorative body 4003. By rotating the peripheral decoration ring 4204 in accordance with the rotation of the rotary decoration body 4003, the dynamism that appears when the handle 4102 is pulled can be further increased.
[Example 400B-4]: 7: In the gaming machine, a shutter for opening and closing the round window is provided on the round window facing the rotary decorative body 4003, and with the start of the player participation effect provided by the pachinko machine 1 Open and close when finished. If such a shutter is opened to inform the pachinko machine 1 of the result of the determination as to whether or not the player's participation is permitted, the player waits with expectation as to whether or not the shutter is opened, and the interest in the game is enhanced. Can be suppressed.

  The fourth effect operation unit 400C has been described centering on the linear member 4202 as the operating tool, but if the operation directionality (corresponding to the linear member direction) is the same, another configuration is used for the linear member 4202. It can be used instead. For example, the rotation of the drive wheel 4106 is driven by a pinion gear attached to the drive wheel 4106 by a rack gear operated from the outside, and the rack gear is connected to an aircraft-shaped handle disposed outside the plate unit 320 by a universal joint structure, A structure is conceivable in which the handle can be operated in all directions (corresponding to the limit area). In this case, a detection device for detecting the operation direction (corresponding to the linear member direction detection device 4128) is disposed around the handle shaft.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit (door frame)
110 Door frame base 111 Through hole (window)
320 Plate unit 400 Production operation unit 400A Second production operation unit 410 Operation buttons (operation receiving unit)
411 button lens 460 door frame side effect display device (door frame side light emitting decoration)
460A Second effect display device on door frame side (light emitting decoration on door frame side)
461 Liquid crystal display device 470 Screen unit 1000 Front component 1100 Gaming panel 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3100 Back front decoration unit 3130 Back front lower decoration unit 3131 Lower front lower center lens (light emitting decoration part on the game board side)
3134 Back front lower decorative board 3500 Back upper movable rendering unit 3510 Back upper first decorative body unit 3511 First left movable decorative lens (openable decorative part, openable decorative part divided body)
3512 First right movable decorative lens (open / close decorative part, open / close decorative part divided body)
3513 First fixed decorative lens (movable light-emitting decoration part, light-emitting decoration part divided body)
3514 Back upper first decorative substrate 3530 Back upper second decorative body unit 3531 Second left movable decorative lens (open / close decorative section, open / close decorative section divided body)
3532 Second right movable decorative lens (open / close decorative part, open / close decorative part divided body)
3533 Second fixed decorative lens (movable light-emitting decoration part, light-emitting decoration part divided body)
3534 upper back second decorative substrate 3550 back upper third decorative body unit 3551 third left movable decorative lens (openable decorative part, openable decorative part divided body)
3552 Third right movable decorative lens (open / close decorative part, open / close decorative part divided body)
3553 Third fixed decorative lens (movable light-emitting decoration part, light-emitting decoration part divided body)
3554 Back upper third decorative substrate 3570 Back upper rotating base unit (decoration section moving means, moving base body)
3586 Action lever (action body)
3600 Back up / down unit (decoration part moving means)
3610 Movable unit 3611 Movable base (decoration part moving means, appearance base)

4000 Rotating part 4001 Rotating body frame 4002 Mounting board 4003 Rotating decorative body 4004 Base block 4005 Storage recess 4006 Bearing part (left)
4007 Bearing part (right)
4008 First drive shaft 4009 Passive gear 4010 Disk 4011 LED
4012 Second drive shaft 4013 Left side wall 4014 Bearing 4015 Drive gear 4016 Engagement projection 4017 Z frame 4018 Y frame 4019 Z horizontal portion 4020 Left Z vertical portion 4021 Right Z vertical portion 4022 Z rotation shaft 4023 Left Z bearing 4024 Right Z bearing 4025 Y horizontal part 4026 Y vertical part 4027 Y bearing 4028 Z sector gear 4029 Z pinion gear 4030 Y sector gear 4031 Y pinion gear 4032 Right universal joint 4033 Left universal joint 4034 Band area 4035 LED line 4036 Color LED
4037 Flashing device 4038 Flash switch 4039 Flash lamp 4040 Generator (rotation speed sensor)
4041 first electromagnetic clutch 4042 assist motor

4100 Drive unit 4101 Casing 4102 Pull 4103 Third drive shaft 4104 Left bearing 4105 Right bearing 4106 Drive wheel 4107 Spring spring 4108 Winding groove 4109 One-way rotation clutch 4110 Engagement projection 4111 Outer ring 4112 Inner ring 4113 Wedge-shaped space 4114 Roller 4115 Urging spring 4116 engagement rod 4117 spring case 4118 outer wall 4119 inner wall 4120 bottom wall 4121 engagement groove 4122 reverse drive gear 4123 idle gear 4124 clutch gear 4125 link 4126 switching clutch mechanism 4127 lever 4128 linear member direction detecting device 4129 annular outer wall 4130 annular Inner wall 4131 annular bottom wall 4132 donut-shaped container 4133 actuator 4134 slit 4135 linear member contact piece 413 Whirling axis 4137 cylindrical shaft portion 4138 handful unit 4139 guide oblique side 4140a linear cut 4140b straight cuts 4141 pushbuttons 4142 LED substrate 4143 control box 4144 guide cone 4145 brake system 4146 second electromagnetic clutch

4200 Cover 4201 Outlet 4202 Linear member 4203 Guide roller 4204 Peripheral decoration ring 4205 Transparent dome cover 4206 Pressing ring 4207 Limit area 4208 Depression 4209 Annular projection 4210 Guide projection 4211 Cylindrical projection 4212 Guide hole

4300 Control unit 4301 Main control board
4302 Peripheral control board 4303 Peripheral control section 4304 Liquid crystal / sound control section 4305 Frame peripheral relay terminal board 4306 Peripheral door relay terminal board 4307 Frame decoration drive amplifier board 4308 Various boards for door frame, etc.

Claims (1)

A game area in which a predetermined game is performed;
A bulging portion forming member that is provided on the door frame and forms a bulging portion that bulges forward below the game area in front view;
An upper plate main body in which a game medium for performing a game in the game area is stored,
A lower plate main body which is disposed below the upper plate main body and through which a game medium can flow from a predetermined supply port to a storage area formed by a bottom wall having a predetermined shape and a vertical wall having a predetermined height,
A lower plate cover provided in a form directly connected to the lower plate body,
With
A predetermined internal space that is inaccessible to the player is formed inside the bulging portion,
The bulging portion forming member has a bulging shape that is vertically continuous from the front side of the upper plate main body to near the lower end of the door frame,
The lower plate cover is configured separately from the bulging portion forming member and the lower plate body,
The gaming machine, wherein the lower plate main body, the lower plate cover, and the bulging portion forming member function as a part of a member forming the internal space .

Images